You are on page 1of 232

FLINTAB INSTRUCTION

2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek


4-54935
Edition 1.7

Instruction
Weight indicator 47-20 Basic

FLINTAB WEIGHT INDICATOR 47-20

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 1 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

- This page is intentionally left blank -

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 2 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Revisions
Date Revision Notes Signed
2009-10-08 1.0 First edition TK
2009-10-20 1.1 Minor changes of example images. TK
2010-08-23 1.2 Changed all images to new colour scheme, added TK
information about new features: dosing and setpoint
quick access. Revised other functions that have been
modified.
2011-03-24 1.3 Revised settings due to changes in functionality. Added TK
information about preset tare, multiple indicators and
PLC block.
2011-04-28 1.4 Incorrect pin designations on Excitation+/- in section TK
10.1. Polarity was reversed, corrected.
Updated printout examples with tare values.
2011-12-15 1.5 Added information about subtypes 47-20-02/03 in TK
section 10.
Added subtypes 47-20-02 /03 in section 12.2.
2012-03-29 1.6 Added information about multi-range, id-prompt and TK
new serial protocols Modbus, Toledo8530 and PrintLog.
New options for I/O interface (external power).
2012-06-28 1.7 Incorrect pin designation on COM1 RS485 interface TK
corrected.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 3 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

- This page is intentionally left blank -

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 4 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Contents
1 Introduction ......................................................................................................... 11
1.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 11

2 Weight indicator display .................................................................................... 13


2.1 Weight display .................................................................................................................... 14
2.1.1 Weight display plug-ins ........................................................................................... 15
2.2 Scale parameters.................................................................................................................. 16
2.3 Button panel ........................................................................................................................ 17
2.3.1 Lock/Unlock weighing functions............................................................................. 18

3 Start-up sequence................................................................................................ 19

4 Standard weighing functions ............................................................................. 21


4.1 Zero setting.......................................................................................................................... 21
4.2 Tare weighing...................................................................................................................... 22
4.3 Weight printouts .................................................................................................................. 23
4.4 High resolution weight display ........................................................................................... 24
4.5 Preset tare ............................................................................................................................ 25
4.6 Alternating indicators / scale platforms .............................................................................. 26
4.7 Input signal test ................................................................................................................... 27

5 Advanced weighing functions ............................................................................ 29


5.1 Dosing or batching .............................................................................................................. 30
5.1.1 Dose module ............................................................................................................ 32
5.1.1.1 Dose module, edit target weight ................................................................ 33
5.1.2 Batch module ........................................................................................................... 34
5.1.2.1 Batch mode/target ...................................................................................... 35
5.1.2.2 Batch status ................................................................................................ 36
5.2 Set point quick access ......................................................................................................... 37
5.2.1 Set point quick access, edit value ............................................................................ 38
5.3 ID-Prompt ........................................................................................................................... 39

6 Utility functions ................................................................................................... 41


6.1 Data Storage Device (Alibi memory) ................................................................................. 42
6.2 Weight data recorder ........................................................................................................... 43
6.3 Status information ............................................................................................................... 44
6.4 Display test .......................................................................................................................... 45
6.5 Digital I/O test and viewer tool ........................................................................................... 46
6.6 Anybus tool ......................................................................................................................... 48

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 5 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

6.7 Database tool ....................................................................................................................... 48


6.8 Automatic weighing tool ..................................................................................................... 48
6.9 Dosing tool .......................................................................................................................... 49
6.10 Graphic analyser tool .......................................................................................................... 49

7 Protected access functions .................................................................................. 51


7.1 Touch screen calibration ..................................................................................................... 52
7.2 Factory reset ........................................................................................................................ 53
7.3 Update firmware.................................................................................................................. 54
7.4 Full Calibration ................................................................................................................... 56
7.4.1 Step 1, Unit selection and OIML mode ................................................................... 57
7.4.2 Step 2, Division size and decimal point ................................................................... 57
7.4.3 Step 3, Enter max. weight ........................................................................................ 58
7.4.4 Step 4, Enter multi-interval/range settings .............................................................. 58
7.4.5 Step 5, Review scale configuration.......................................................................... 59
7.4.6 Step 6, Select calibration method ............................................................................ 60
7.4.7 Step 7, Set zero level (calibrate zero) ...................................................................... 60
7.4.8 Step 8, Enter calibration (test) weight ..................................................................... 61
7.4.9 Step 9, Set calibration point (acquire test weight) ................................................... 61
7.4.10 Step 10, Preview calibration result, save settings .................................................... 62
7.4.11 Data sheet Step 7, Enter loadcell capacity ............................................................... 62
7.4.12 Data sheet Step 8, Add/Remove loadcells ............................................................... 63
7.4.13 Data sheet Step 9, select zerolevel method .............................................................. 65
7.4.14 Data sheet Step 10-1, Measure scale zero level ....................................................... 66
7.4.15 Data sheet Step 10-2, Calculate scale zero level ..................................................... 66
7.4.16 Data sheet Step 11, Preview calibration result, save settings .................................. 67
7.5 Graphic analyser tool .......................................................................................................... 68
7.5.1 FFT analyzing tool ................................................................................................... 70

8 Settings editor ...................................................................................................... 71


8.1 Settings, backup and recovery tool ..................................................................................... 75
8.1.1 Settings backup root folders .................................................................................... 76
8.1.2 Local recovery point ................................................................................................ 77
8.1.2.1 Create a new recovery point ...................................................................... 77
8.1.2.2 Restore recovery point ............................................................................... 78
8.1.2.3 Delete recovery point................................................................................. 79
8.1.3 External full backup ................................................................................................. 80
8.1.3.1 Create a full backup ................................................................................... 80
8.1.3.2 Restore from a full backup ........................................................................ 82
8.1.4 Backup settings group .............................................................................................. 84
8.1.4.1 Create backup for a single node/parameter ............................................... 84

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 6 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.1.4.2 Restore a single node/parameter ................................................................ 86


8.2 Indicator .............................................................................................................................. 87
8.2.1 PrimaryIndicator ...................................................................................................... 87
8.2.2 NumInternalIndicators ............................................................................................. 88
8.2.3 NumExtIndicators .................................................................................................... 88
8.2.4 NumSumIndicators .................................................................................................. 89
8.2.5 NumPlaybackIndicators ........................................................................................... 89
8.2.6 NumPulseIndicators ................................................................................................. 90
8.2.7 NumFlowIndicators ................................................................................................. 90
8.2.8 Settings for all indicators ......................................................................................... 91
8.2.8.1 External indicator, VirtualAD ................................................................... 94
8.2.8.2 Playback Indicator, VirtualAD .................................................................. 95
8.2.8.3 Summing indicator, VirtualAD ................................................................. 96
8.2.8.4 Pulse indicator, VirtualAD ........................................................................ 97
8.2.8.5 Flow indicator, VirtualAD ......................................................................... 98
8.2.8.6 Loadcells__ ................................................................................................ 99
8.2.8.7 ADConverter ........................................................................................... 100
8.2.8.8 IIRFilter___ ............................................................................................. 102
8.2.8.9 Automatic ................................................................................................ 103
8.2.8.9.1 Calc Params ............................................................................. 105
8.2.8.9.2 Trigglevel ................................................................................ 106
8.2.8.10 WeightBuffering ...................................................................................... 107
8.3 Application ........................................................................................................................ 108
8.3.1 Log_______ ........................................................................................................... 109
8.3.1.1 Sections_____ .......................................................................................... 110
8.3.2 Alibi______ ........................................................................................................... 111
8.3.3 WatchDog .............................................................................................................. 111
8.4 Communication ................................................................................................................. 112
8.4.1 Protocol__ .............................................................................................................. 113
8.4.1.1 Anybus[COM2] ....................................................................................... 113
8.4.1.2 Flintab___ ................................................................................................ 114
8.4.1.2.1 Proto1-Proto8___ .................................................................... 114
8.4.1.3 Printout__ ................................................................................................ 116
8.4.1.3.1 Totalizing ................................................................................. 116
8.4.1.4 PrintLog___ ............................................................................................. 117
8.4.1.5 Toledo8530 .............................................................................................. 118
8.4.1.5.1 Proto1-Proto8 .......................................................................... 118
8.4.1.6 Modbus___ .............................................................................................. 119
8.4.1.6.1 Proto1-Proto8 .......................................................................... 119
8.4.2 Devices____........................................................................................................... 120
8.5 UserInterface ..................................................................................................................... 121

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 7 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.5.1 Display___ ............................................................................................................. 121


8.5.2 MapIoToFunction___ ............................................................................................ 121
8.5.3 Buttons___ ............................................................................................................. 122
8.5.4 PowerOn___ .......................................................................................................... 123
8.6 SetPoints............................................................................................................................ 124
8.6.1 SP1 to SP16 ........................................................................................................... 124
8.7 Conveyor ........................................................................................................................... 125
8.8 PLC______ ....................................................................................................................... 126
8.8.1 Ladder, PLC ladder block ...................................................................................... 127
8.8.1.1 Ladder, Conditions .................................................................................. 128
8.8.1.2 Ladder, examples ..................................................................................... 130
8.8.2 SRFlipFlop, Set/Reset block with timers ............................................................... 132
8.8.2.1 SRFlipFlop, parameters ........................................................................... 132
8.8.2.2 SRFlipFlop, examples ............................................................................. 133
8.8.3 TFlipFlop, Toggle block ........................................................................................ 135
8.8.3.1 TFlipFlop, parameters ............................................................................. 135
8.8.3.2 TFlipFlop, examples ................................................................................ 136
8.8.4 IndicatorLadder, PLC ladder with indicator states ................................................ 137
8.9 FileLogs............................................................................................................................. 138
8.9.1 DefaultLog ............................................................................................................. 138
8.10 Dose_____......................................................................................................................... 140
8.10.1 LogSettings ............................................................................................................ 142
8.10.2 Dose_____ ............................................................................................................. 142
8.10.2.1 DoseModuleStarted ................................................................................. 143
8.10.2.2 Batch______ ............................................................................................ 143
8.10.2.3 Start_____ ................................................................................................ 144
8.10.2.4 Stop_____ ................................................................................................ 144
8.10.2.5 Pause_____ .............................................................................................. 144
8.10.2.6 Abort_____ .............................................................................................. 145
8.10.2.7 PreDose_____ .......................................................................................... 145
8.10.2.8 ZeroCheck ............................................................................................... 146
8.10.2.9 Tare_____ ................................................................................................ 147
8.10.2.10 CourseDose.............................................................................. 148
8.10.2.11 FineDose_ ................................................................................ 149
8.10.2.12 PostDose_____ ........................................................................ 150
8.10.2.13 Target_____ ............................................................................. 151
8.10.2.14 WaitCalcWeight ...................................................................... 153
8.10.2.15 Ready_____ ............................................................................. 153
8.10.2.16 Empty_____ ............................................................................ 154
8.10.2.17 Error_____ ............................................................................... 155
8.10.2.18 Alarm_____ ............................................................................. 156

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 8 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.19 NoFlow_____ .......................................................................... 157


8.10.2.20 IsDosing ................................................................................... 157
8.11 IdPrompt ............................................................................................................................ 158
8.11.1 IdPrompt1 .............................................................................................................. 158
8.11.1.1 Step1-StepX ............................................................................................. 159

9 Instrument digital I/O ...................................................................................... 161


9.1 Memory markers ............................................................................................................... 162
9.2 Indicator status flags ......................................................................................................... 163
9.3 Standard I/O signals .......................................................................................................... 164
9.4 Extended I/O signals ......................................................................................................... 165
9.5 Legacy I/O signals............................................................................................................. 167
9.6 Digital I/O examples ......................................................................................................... 169
9.6.1 Example, non-automatic checkweigher ................................................................. 170
9.6.1.1 Setpoint setup .......................................................................................... 172
9.6.1.2 IndicatorLadder setup .............................................................................. 173
9.6.1.3 Ladder setup ............................................................................................ 174
9.6.1.4 SRFlipFlop setup ..................................................................................... 178

10 Connections ....................................................................................................... 181


10.1 Loadcells ........................................................................................................................... 182
10.2 COM1 – RS232/RS485 ..................................................................................................... 183
10.3 COM3 – RS232 ................................................................................................................. 184
10.4 Opto-isolated I/O ............................................................................................................... 185
10.4.1 Example, connection of inputs............................................................................... 186
10.4.2 Example, connection of outputs............................................................................. 187
10.5 Fieldbus (COM2) .............................................................................................................. 187
10.6 Ethernet 10/100Mb............................................................................................................ 188
10.7 USB-A (Host).................................................................................................................... 188
10.8 USB-B (Client).................................................................................................................. 189
10.9 12VDC power supply........................................................................................................ 189
10.10 Extended I/O board 4-54984.................................................................................. 190
10.11 Legacy I/O board 4-55043 ..................................................................................... 192
10.11.1 47-04:COM1 Interface ............................................................................ 194
10.11.2 47-04:Photocell interface ......................................................................... 195
10.11.3 47-04:I/O interface .................................................................................. 196

11 Error or status indications ............................................................................... 197


11.1 Non-automatic mode ......................................................................................................... 197
11.2 Automatic mode ................................................................................................................ 198

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 9 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

12 Technical specifications .................................................................................... 201


12.1 Electrical ........................................................................................................................... 201
12.2 Mechanical ........................................................................................................................ 202

Appendix A – Button cross reference .................................................................... 205

Appendix B – Flintab standard protocol .............................................................. 209


A.B.1 Automatic and non-automatic mode weighing ...................................................... 209
A.B.2 Non-automatic weighing........................................................................................ 210
A.B.2.1 Messages received in non-automatic mode ............................................. 210
A.B.2.2 Messages sent on request in non-automatic mode................................... 212
A.B.2.3 Examples of non-automatic weighing sequences .................................... 215
A.B.3 Automatic mode weighing ..................................................................................... 216
A.B.3.1 Messages received when data collection is not active ............................. 216
A.B.3.2 Messages sent on request when data collection is not active .................. 218
A.B.3.3 Message handling while data collection is active .................................... 218
A.B.3.4 Messages sent in automatic mode after data collection has ended .......... 220
A.B.3.5 Example of automatic weighing sequences ............................................. 222
A.B.4 Error codes ............................................................................................................. 224

Appendix C – Printout examples ........................................................................... 227


Appendix D – Installation checklist, Dosing ......................................................... 229
A.D.1 Define and configure I/O ....................................................................................... 229
A.D.2 Configure dosing stages ......................................................................................... 230
A.D.3 Setup initial dosing parameters .............................................................................. 231
A.D.4 Fine tuning of dosing parameters........................................................................... 232

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 10 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

1 Introduction
Thank you for choosing a Flintab weight indicator.
Flintab scales and indicators combine weighing functions and features to
provide exceptional flexibility, user friendly operation and reliability.
The 47-20 weight indicator can be configured to suit most applications.
The integrated interfaces enable problem free data transmissions to and from
peripheral equipment and due to its rugged construction the weight indicator
can be installed in most environments.
By carefully studying this manual, all the features offered by the weight
indicator can be fully appreciated.

1.1 General
Weight indicator 47-20 is the latest generation of Flintab instruments which
combines modern technology with flexible design, making it suitable for most
weighing applications. Weighing capacity, filtering and other weighing
parameters are fully selectable and can be configured to suit any scale and
weighing requirements. The main features are:
• Compact and rugged construction for industrial applications.
• Very high speed (28000 samples/s) 4 channel loadcell interface
• Integrated interfaces (some optional)
• Up to 3 serial ports, RS232 and/or RS485
• Native fieldbus support; Modbus, Profibus, CANopen, DeviceNet,
Modbus-TCP, Profinet-IO, EtherCAT and many more.
• 100MB Ethernet
• 4 channel opto-isolated NPN outputs and 3 channel opto-isolated
inputs
• USB host and slave interfaces
• 4.3” colour touch screen with large easy-to-read indications and a ‘finger-
friendly’ touch screen adapted interface
• Optional integrated DSD (data storage device, ALIBI) for up-to10 million
transactions.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 11 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

- This page is intentionally left blank -

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 12 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

2 Weight indicator display


On the front panel of the indicator the high visibility colour LCD display with
touch screen is used to display weighing related data and function as an input
device for the operator. See image below:

The main view on the display is composed of three distinct areas:


• Top half of display is dedicated to convey weighing related status,
such as weight value, unit, stability etc.
• Bottom right area is dedicated to display scale parameters such as
maximum capacity, scale division/s and interval/s.
• The remaining area (bottom middle and left) is used for operator input
through touch sensitive buttons.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 13 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

2.1 Weight display


The weight display area shows the weight and related status. If there is a
weighing related error normally the display area will indicate with the error
symbol lit and the weight value display will be replaced by a status text. For
other types of information/warnings/errors (for example logs, communication
etc.) the operator info button will be activated, the operator can then, by
pressing the button, display the relevant status information. See image below:

Motion (unstable) Auto mode Calibration mode Current weighing range

High Plug-in ex.


Zero resolution I/O status Error

Negative Weight Unit


sign value

Current indicator
(Press to change) Log
active

Operator info
button
(Press to read)

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 14 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

2.1.1 Weight display plug-ins


On the weight display is an area designated ‘plug-in’. This refers to that the
area does not have a fixed associated display function. Instead the operator
can choose (in the settings editor) between several different kinds of plug-ins
best suited for the operation of the scale. Currently there are five plug-ins
available:
 None, the plug-in area is left blank.
 IO Status <default>, shows the status of the opto-isolated I/O ports,
an activated input or output will be coloured. See image:

 Max, Min and Avg, shows the maximum, minimum and average value
of the raw low-filtered high resolution weight value. By pressing the
button on the plug-in, start values are set to current weight value. See
image:

 Max, Min and Std, shows the maximum, minimum and running
(approx 1 seconds of data) standard deviation of the raw low-filtered
high resolution weight value. By pressing the button on the plug-in,
start values are set to current weight value. See image:

 Clock, shows current date and time. See image:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 15 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

2.2 Scale parameters


The area bottom right displays scale parameters (Capacity Name Plate) and
TAC (TraceableAccessCounter incremented every time calibration mode is
activated). There is also an OIML class III designation and the ‘M’ mark
shown only when the indicator is setup for type-approved mode and
calibration mode is not activated. See image below:

Scale parameters
(Capacity nameplate)

Alternative layout for


multi-range

OIML R76
(also M symbol)

TAC counter

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 16 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

2.3 Button panel


The button panel area is used for operator input and controlling weighing
functions. The panel is divided into weighing functions and application
functions. The application buttons are used to lock/unlock and alternate
between different weighing function groups. See image below:

Weighing functions Alternate weighing


1 group = 8 buttons function groups

Lock / Unlock
weighing functions

Current weighing
function group no.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 17 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

2.3.1 Lock/Unlock weighing functions


Normally the indicator is configured to automatically lock all weighing
functions after a specific timeout. Alternatively the operator can manually
choose to lock the weighing functions when desired. The weighing functions
will then be display as ‘greyed out’. To re-activate the functions the
Lock/Unlock button must be pressed. See image below:

Lock / Unlock
Depending on current
state
Cancel

Restart, only
available when
calibration mode is
active

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 18 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

3 Start-up sequence
Power on will initiate the following sequence steps:
 Boot sequence; initializing hardware, Flintab logotype shown on the
display. Up to 20 seconds.

 Display type, software version and date. Software checksum is


divided into two parts, one checksum for application and one for
indicator (meteorological). Will automatically close after a set period.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 19 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

 The weight indicator will then show the main weight display and enter
normal weight indicator mode. If configured for automatic initial zero
setting at power-on the display will blink at about 0.5-1 Hz while
waiting for the weight value to be within specified range and stable
during the required interval. In that case the zero will automatically be
set. However if the weight value is outside allowed range, the
automatic power-on zero function can be aborted by pressing the
<Start> button. See images below:



\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 20 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

4 Standard weighing functions


The following sections describe how to adjust zero, use the tare facility, print
and related features.
Note: As the weight indicator can be adapted to a larger number of different
weighing applications, some functions may be disabled for a particular scale
or under a particular circumstance. The reason for this is that some functions
may not suit the application or could facilitate incorrect operation of the scale.
In such cases the function button will be displayed ‘greyed out’ and will not
accept operator input.
4.1 Zero setting
A scale may as a result of external conditions indicate a value other than
exact ”0.000”, even when the scale has no load. The zero can, however, be
acquired to ensure that any new weighing always starts at zero. The zero
setting is only allowed to be carried out when the scale is stable and within a
limited range. If the scale cannot be zeroed even when stable, it means that
the range has been exceeded. Zero is set by pressing the <Zero> button. A
typical zero setting is shown below:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 21 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

4.2 Tare weighing


The weight of a container can be tared to enable the net weight of material put
in the container to be displayed. Tare will only operate with stable scale and
weight above zero. The tare function is alternating, i.e. if the scale is already
tared, the weight display is returned to gross weighing. Tare is operated by
pressing the <Tare> button. A typical tare operation is shown below:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 22 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

4.3 Weight printouts


The indicator has a summarized weighing mode with totalizing. When the
operator has finished weighing the individual weights and sum can be printed.
When totalizing net weights the absolute net value is used, i.e. if a negative
net value is shown, it will be converted to positive before added to the sum.
A typical totalizing printout is show below:
• Show the current totalized sum and access print functions. By pressing
the <Print> button. The current number of weights and sum will be
shown until operator press the <Back> button. Add current weight by
pressing the <Add> button.

 

• If the sum is to be printed then press the <Print Total> button. The
sum will automatically be cleared/reset after the printout.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 23 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

4.4 High resolution weight display


In this mode the weight reading is shown with a 10x increased resolution. In
normal operating mode this function will only be active 3 seconds, after this
period the weight display automatically returns to normal. In calibration mode
the momentary press of the key switches into permanent high resolution and
remains until the key is pressed again. Press the <HighResolution> button to
activate the increased resolution display. See example below:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 24 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

4.5 Preset tare


Preset tare allows the operator to enter a user selectable value to use as a tare.
The tare value must be less than the maximum capacity of the indicator or, in
the case of a multiple interval indicator; the entered tare value must be less
than the lowest interval switchover point.
A tare value of zero will clear preset tare operation and switch the indicator to
gross weight mode. Any other legal value will switch the indicator to net
mode with the entered value as tare. The tare value will always be rounded to
the displayed division size. See example below:

 

 

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 25 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

4.6 Alternating indicators / scale platforms


When more than one internal indicator is available, alternating between
indicators (or scales) can be done by pressing on the <Indicator> icon on the
main weight display.
All weighing functions operate on the currently selected indicator. See
example below:

Additionally, an indicator selector can be activated by pressing on the <Select


Indicator> button, where up to four indicators are displayed simultaneously.
In this mode the operator can activate (i.e. select) any of the available
indicators by pressing on its weight display. See example below:


If more than four indicators are available, the next block of four indicators
can be displayed by pressing on the alternate button, bottom right.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 26 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

4.7 Input signal test


The indicator has a facility to display the input signal of the indicator as
mV/V. If the indicator is not normalized the measured value will only be
accurate within approximately ±0.1% from the ‘real’ input signal. Also the
function will display the status of normalization and AD-board temperature.
To activate the signal test function, press and hold on the capacity nameplate
for 5 seconds. After the set time, the capacity nameplate will be replaced by
the signal test utility. See image below:

Press to return to
normal nameplate

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 27 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

- This page is intentionally left blank -

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 28 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

5 Advanced weighing functions


This group has functions that, although they still use the weight value, are not
primarily related to standard weighing scale operations, for example set-
points or dosing.
To access advanced weighing functions the operator need to press the
<Alternate Weighing Function Group> button once, see images below:

Weighing functions group will return to standard if no button is pressed


within a specified timeout. Or alternatively, the operator can press the
alternate function group button repeatedly to revert back to standard weighing
functions.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 29 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

5.1 Dosing or batching


Dose/batch modules are used to dose a single product to or from a container
with an integrated scale. The module has advanced functionality compared to
standard set points such as pre-fill, auto-tare, post-fill, in-flight correction,
course dosing, fine dosing and much more.
The parameters for setting up the module for a specific installation are
covered in section 8.10, an installation guide can be found in

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 30 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Appendix D – Installation checklist, Dosing . This section only covers the


normal operation once the module is properly configured and used in-
operation.
To activate the dose module/s press the dose button, see images below:

Only one dose module enabled:

More than one dose module enabled: 

On the dose module all buttons are of the press and hold type to avoid
unintentional operation. I.e. to activate a button it must be pressed for a
minimum of 1 second.
Depending on if the selected dose module is setup for batching or normal
dosing, different tools will be shown.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 31 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

5.1.1 Dose module


When the dose module is setup for normal dosing, the dose module tool will
be shown, displaying various status information and current target value;

Press to start dosing or


Press to set target Dose state Currently dosed weight stop during dosing

Press to exit dose I/O status Current target weight Press during dosing
module to pause

Dose module Tare value (if used)


messages

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 32 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

5.1.1.1 Dose module, edit target weight


The dose module uses a target value that sets the desired amount to be dosed
to or from the container. By pressing the target button this value can be
changed. See images below:



Switch to spin entry Switch to keypad entry Press 1 second to


(press 0.5 s) (press 0.5s) save and exit

Press 1 second to abort


changes and exit

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 33 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

5.1.2 Batch module


If the selected dose module is setup for batching, the batch module tool will
be shown;
Note: setting of dose target weight is done in the setting editor, see section
8.10.2.12.

Press to view batch Press within frame to change Press to start dosing or
status mode and/or target stop during dosing

Press to exit batch Current batch weight Press during dosing


module to pause

Dose status Target value

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 34 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

5.1.2.1 Batch mode/target


By activating the batch mode/target tool, the operator can set the batch target
and batch mode of operation.

Batch towards a Batch without target weight Opens both inlet and outlets valves
target weight i.e. continuous dosing i.e. no dosing or batching

Press to cancel Press to set batch Press to set batch Press to save
settings and return to target weight start weight settings and return to
batch tool batch tool

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 35 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

5.1.2.2 Batch status


By activating batch status, a detailed status of both dosing and batching will
be displayed;

Press to see Dose target is set through


batch/dose log the settings editor

Press to set batch Press to start dosing or


identification stop during dosing

Press to exit batch Press during dosing


status view to pause

Dose status

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 36 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

5.2 Set point quick access


The indicator can have up to sixteen (16) set points that can be configured in
the settings editor; each set point can be enabled and connected to an output
of the instrument individually. When enabled, the set point quick access
utility can be used to change the set point values. See images below:

The utility has individual buttons for changing each set point value and a
visual indication of current weight is below or over set value. The label
entered for the set point is shown a heading above the value. See image
below:

Green arrow = weight Edit this set point Set point value Press 1 second to
below set point return to normal
button panel.
Red arrow = weight
above set point Next four set points
(if available).

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 37 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

5.2.1 Set point quick access, edit value


The standard input method for changing the set point value is a spin editor
mimicking a mechanical thumbwheel input device. However the operator can
at any time alternate between the standard keypad entry and spin entry input
method. See images below:



Switch to keypad entry Press 1 second to Switch to spin entry


(press 0.5s) save and exit (press 0.5 s)

Press 1 second to abort


changes and exit

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 38 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

5.3 ID-Prompt
Id-prompt is a configurable sequence handler for operator input and printing.
Number of steps, the length and type of data for input is setup through the
settings editor.
If no ID-prompt is defined, then the button will be displayed greyed-out else
see images below:

The ID-prompt sequence will, depending on setup, allow the operator to


enter/view relevant weighing related data such as, but not limited to,
identification, batch-number, sequence-number etc. It will also allow the
operator to acquire the current weight value at command, and then print all of
the collected data to the log printer.
As the module is configurable the exact sequence and type of data to be
entered needs to be documented by the system installer.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 39 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

- This page is intentionally left blank -

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 40 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

6 Utility functions
To access utility functions, the operator need to press the <Alternate
Weighing Function Group> button twice, see images below:


*2

Weighing functions group will return to standard if no button is pressed


within a specified timeout. Or alternatively, the operator can press the
alternate function group button repeatedly to revert back to standard weighing
functions.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 41 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

6.1 Data Storage Device (Alibi memory)


The weight indicator has an optional data storage device (DSD, Alibi) to store
weight transactions sent to peripheral systems (Printers, computers). Each
time a weight transaction is triggered the weight is stored and designated a
unique sequence number. The sequence number is sent accompanying the
weight to the peripheral system. The sequence number can later be used to
retrieve information of the weight transaction through the DSD reader utility.
Press the <DataStorageDevice> button to start the reader utility. See images
below:

 

The DSD, when installed, has a capacity of about 10’000’000 unique weight
transactions, after this number of transactions has been stored; the number of
the oldest transaction is re-used (wrap-around).
The indicator also has a feature called instrument ID number, where a two
digit prefix can be attached to each alibi number, generating a 9 digit number.
When reading the DSD the alibi number should always be entered without
this prefix, i.e. use only last 7 digits.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 42 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

6.2 Weight data recorder


The weight indicator has functionality to log weight values at a specific time
interval, event or a specific number of updates. The settings for the weight
data recorder (default file log) are found trough the settings editor, see section
8.9.1.
Currently the log file cannot be viewed on the instrument; it should either be
stored on a removable media or transferred through USB.
When the settings are set, the log can be started and stopped on the utility
button panel, by pressing the <Start log> and <Stop log> respectively:

Stop log Log running indication

Start log

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 43 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

6.3 Status information


The weight indicator will automatically update a information log when
specific events occur. If the event contains important information the
<Operator Info> button on the main display will be activated. For other more
status related information, the button on the main display will not be
activated, but the operator can still view the messages by pressing the <Status
information> button on the utility button panel. See images below:

The settings controlling the level (error, warning, info, verbose) of status
information to be logged is set through the settings editor.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 44 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

6.4 Display test


To guarantee that the display is fully working the weight indicator has a built-
in display test. The test will alternate all segments on the main weight display.
To start display test press the <Display test> button. See images below:

The display will alternate between, all segments on and all segments off,
about 10 seconds before automatically returning to normal weight display.
Note: the display test does not alternate the display plug-in.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 45 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

6.5 Digital I/O test and viewer tool


The indicator has an input/output (I/O) test tool that will show the status for
digital inputs and allow for manipulation of digital outputs.
Important: Manipulation of outputs requires explicit user activation. It’s up to

! !
the operator to carefully assess that outputs does not operate on machinery or
systems that can pose a threat to personal safety or cause machine faults. By
operating this tool, the user acknowledges full responsibility.
Normally this tool is only accessible when ButtonPanel4 is activated, see
section 8.5.3.
Note: If an output is coupled with a currently running process such as dosing,
set points etc. the output will be continuously regulated even during the usage
of this tool as the indicator is still in operation. This means that these outputs
will always revert to the state dictated by the process, even if the user tries to
set other states.
To start the tool press the <I/O> button, see image below:

The available I/O’s are shown with the current status, colorized (orange)
means that the respective input or output is activated.
In addition to the available physical I/O signals (standard is four inputs and
four outputs) 32 so called markers are available. Markers are internal
memory only I/O signals; they can be used by any process that requires inputs
or outputs but does not require an actual physical signal to be used.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 46 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

To allow user manipulation of outputs and markers, press the <Yes> button
for 2 seconds. See image below:

When the <Yes> button is lit red, the corresponding signal can be alternated
by pressing on it. However if the signal is controlled by an active module
such as set points, the signal can behave erratically as there are two possibly
competing states wanting to act on it. For test purposes its advices that all
modules acting upon I/O signals are disabled when operating this tool. See
image below:

When finished with the tool, press the <Exit> button for more than 1 second.
Note: Outputs and markers will keep the state they currently have when
exiting the tool, i.e. they will not be reset to the state they were in when the
tool was started, unless an active module is operating on it.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 47 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

6.6 Anybus tool


The Anybus tool can be used when a active Anybus fieldbus module is fitted.
This tool will display fieldbus ID and fieldbus data.

6.7 Database tool


The database tool is used for configuring and/or exploring the local or
external database. Only to be used by qualified technicians.

6.8 Automatic weighing tool


The automatic weighing tool can be used when automatic weighing is
activated. The tool will display the max, min, latest weight and graphic
representation of automatic weighing sequences.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 48 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

6.9 Dosing tool


The dosing tool can be used when dosing is active (background dosing
required) to view a graphic representation of the dosing cycle.

6.10 Graphic analyser tool


The graphics analyser tool is used to view a graphics representation of the
unprocessed and unfiltered raw analogue loadcell signal. The tool can also be
used to perform a FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) on input data to view
frequency components. This tool can only be used when calibration mode is
active. For more information see section 7.5.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 49 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

- This page is intentionally left blank -

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 50 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7 Protected access functions


On the back panel of the instrument there is a hole where a protected access
key (calibration push-button) can be found. If activated, calibration mode is
enabled and several functions not normally accessible will be allowed to be
operated.
Each time calibration mode is enabled, the TAC (TraceableAccessCounter)
will be incremented. The current TAC counter is displayed in the scale
parameters area; this counter is not affected by a factory reset.

SCALE
LOADCELLS GND COM3

12VDC
USB-A

USB-B
Fieldbus (COM2) ETH0
I/O COM1
CAL

Protected access push-button

Calibration mode active is indicated on the main display with the upside-
down triangle, se image below:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 51 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.1 Touch screen calibration


This function fine-tunes the touch screen detection. It’s advisable that the
calibration is always done with a pointy non sharp device, such as a stylus,
plastic retracted ball point pen or similar. Using fingers will result in a very
imprecise calibration.
For activation, the protected access key must be depressed more than 5
seconds, then at release the touch calibration tool will be activated. The
touch screen must then be clicked-on before the timeout expires to start the
calibration sequence. The calibration sequence involves a 5 point target
sampling. When finished, exit the calibration by double tapping anywhere on
the screen. See images below:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 52 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.2 Factory reset


This function will reset *all* parameters in the indicator, including the
calibration. Only the TAC counter is retained. Use with caution.
For activation, the protected access key must be depressed more than 5
seconds, then at release the touch calibration tool will be activated; do not
touch the display during the countdown. After the timeout, the factory reset
tool is displayed.
Press the <Reset to Factory Defaults> to reset all settings, and then confirm
by pressing <Ok> if all settings are to be erased. See images below:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 53 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.3 Update firmware


This function will normally not reset the parameters in the indicator. However
use with caution as the new firmware might not be 100% compatible with
your application. Always consult Flintab when updating your firmware.
Insert a Flintab provided USB-memory stick with the new firmware into the
indicator. Note: Updating of firmware requires the files on the USB-stick to
be in a certain order and in the correct directories, therefore only use
firmware supplied directly from Flintab. When the USB stick is inserted
perform the following tasks;
For activation, the protected access key must be depressed more than 5
seconds, then at release the touch calibration tool will be activated; do not
touch the display during the countdown. After the timeout, the factory reset
tool is displayed.
Press the <Run Update Tool> to launch the update firmware tool. See images
below:

Make sure the USB-memory stick is inserted into the indicator before
proceeding.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 54 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Press the <Update Application> button to start the update procedure. When
finished, the indicator will restart.

When the indicator has restarted, the update procedure is finished and the
USB-memory stick can be removed from the indicator.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 55 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.4 Full Calibration


To adapt the indicator to a specific scale a full calibration must be performed.
During this sequence, parameters that define the scale and reference points
for empty and loaded scale are set.
Full calibration is also required for external or virtual indicators, but only as a
configuration stage, setting up the parameters maximum capacity, scale
intervals, unit and format (Steps 1-5). Actual calibration with test weights is
skipped for these indicators. Also, the external or virtual indicator does need
to be connected while performing the configuration.
A full calibration can be done with either, test-weight and scale connected, or
alternatively with data entered from loadcell datasheets. Optionally, the
instrument can also be normalized with a loadcell simulator before the
calibration sequence, this means that the calibration data can be transferred to
another indicator, also normalized, yet still retain the calibration accuracy.
See separate section.
Before an instrument is calibrated, the weight display flashes continuously.
When a full calibration is performed, the flashing will stop. Calibration tools
are always accessible in the settings editor for the Indicator, see separate
section. However most instruments also have a shortcut in one of the button
panels, in that case press the <Full calibration> button to start the sequence.
See images below:

Calibration mode must be active!

In the case of multiple indicators:


 The indicator / scale platform that
will be calibrated.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 56 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.4.1 Step 1, Unit selection and OIML mode


Select desired weighing unit and OIML R76 mode. If R76 mode is activated
then the weight indicator will limit some settings such as zero tracking, filter
and stability requirements to conform to the international recommendation
OIMLR76 which is also basis for European standard EN45501. If a setting is
set outside accepted range it will automatically be reset to the closets suitable
setting at start-up.
On the right pane the current scale parameters are displayed, they will be
modified in the following steps and therefore can temporarily show incorrect
data.

Press the right arrow on the left pane, to proceed to the next step.
7.4.2 Step 2, Division size and decimal point
Select division, for multi-interval scales select the interval to be used in the
lowest interval (smallest). Then select number of decimals to be used. Note
the previous unit selection and division size. Example: selecting unit = ‘kg’,
division = ‘10’ and decimals = ’0.00’ means that one division (the smallest
weight possible) will be shown as: 0.10 kg.
On the right pane the current scale parameters are displayed, they will be
modified in the following steps and therefore can temporarily show incorrect
data.

Press the right arrow on the left pane, to proceed to the next step.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 57 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.4.3 Step 3, Enter max. weight


Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the maximum weighing capacity of the
scale (excluding dead load). Make sure that dead load and maximum weight
put together does not exceed the total capacity of the loadcells. The
previously selected unit, division size and decimal point will be used to
calculate number of divisions for the scale; this will be shown under the input
field.

Press the right arrow on the left pane, to proceed to the next step.
7.4.4 Step 4, Enter multi-interval/range settings
The weight indicator can be setup to use up-to three intervals; here the
breakpoints between the intervals are set. When the weight passes a
breakpoint, division size is automatically switched to the next larger size.
When unloaded the division size will switch back to the smaller sizes at the
configured breakpoints
Alternatively the indicator can be setup to use a dual range scheme, in this
mode the indicator will likewise switch to the next larger division size when
the weight passes the breakpoint, however the larger division will be retained
until the scale is unloaded. I.e. the indicator will operate as two scales, each
with a different division size; the indicator will automatically choose the
appropriate range depending on current and previous load. This mode will
also round tare values to the scale interval in the highest activated range.
If multi-interval or dual-range is not to be used, then leave both interval
settings at zero

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 58 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Interval 1 is the lowest breakpoint and interval 2 is the highest. The order
must be zerointerval 1interval2maximum weight. If only two intervals
are to be used, then leave interval 2 at zero.

Three intervals example

Check for dual-range mode

Dual range example

Press the right arrow on the left pane, to proceed to the next step.
7.4.5 Step 5, Review scale configuration
The parameters that define the scale are now set-up and the new configuration
will be shown in the right pane. If the settings are correct then proceed by
pressing on the right arrow. Otherwise press the left arrow and correct the
settings as needed before continuing.

Press the right arrow on the left pane, to proceed to the next step.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 59 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.4.6 Step 6, Select calibration method


There are two methods for calibrating a scale, the most common is using a
connected scale (loadcells) and test weights, but it’s also possible to perform
a calibration with data from the loadcell datasheets. Using test weights will
always achieve a better scale and more accurate weighing. Datasheet
calibration needs a normalization of the instrument with a loadcell simulator
to make sure that the resulting calibration meets the necessary accuracy. This
normalization must be done before calibration takes place, please consult
your representative if you have any questions about this feature.

Choose test weight calibration if you have a scale and test weight available,
else make sure indicator is normalized and you have the datasheets for the
loadcells, before choosing data sheet calibration. Data sheet calibration is
covered in section 7.4.11to 7.4.16.
7.4.7 Step 7, Set zero level (calibrate zero)
Make sure that the scale is empty of all foreign material (containers etc) and
that the dead-load (platform etc.) is mounted on the scale. Then press the <Set
zero level> button and wait for the zero sampling to be completed.

Current input signal level

When the zero level has been successfully acquired, the calibration sequence
will automatically proceed to the next step.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 60 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.4.8 Step 8, Enter calibration (test) weight


Prepare the test weight to be placed on the scale in the next step and enter its
value here. The test weight can be entered with a higher resolution (smaller
division) than the scale. It’s advisable that the test weight is always at least
50% of maximum capacity, preferably over 75%. As a guide to the operator,
the percentage of maximum capacity for the test weight is shown under the
input field, calibration weights below 25% are not accepted as they will result
in an imprecise calibration.
Press the right arrow on the left pane, to proceed to the next step.

7.4.9 Step 9, Set calibration point (acquire test weight)


Make sure the test weight entered in the previous step is placed on the scale,
and then press the <Set calibration point> button and wait for the test weight
sampling to be completed.

Current input signal level

When the calibration point (test weight) has been successfully acquired, the
calibration sequence will automatically proceed to the next step.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 61 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.4.10 Step 10, Preview calibration result, save settings


Before the calibration is accepted and the settings are saved, the preliminary
result can be reviewed. The weight is shown with increased resolution (10x)
to give an indication of the quality of the calibration. The current input signal
from the scale (loadcells) as mV/V is also shown. The operator can now
choose to either accept the setting by pressing the <Save settings> button, or
to go back to redo any of the previous steps by pressing the left arrow on the
left panel.

7.4.11 Data sheet Step 7, Enter loadcell capacity


A data sheet calibration can be performed when the capacity and rated output
of the loadcell/s are known. To achieve a good result, the indicator must be
normalized with a loadcell simulator before the calibration is done. See
separate section. The first step is to enter maximum capacity of one single
loadcell (all loadcells must have the same capacity).

Press the right arrow on the left pane, to proceed to the next step.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 62 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.4.12 Data sheet Step 8, Add/Remove loadcells


This panel will show a summary of the loadcells rated output currently used
for the datasheet calibration. The operator can add or remove loadcells by
pressing the Add/Remove button.

 

The currently highlighted loadcell can be removed by pressing the remove


button:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 63 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

When all loadcells are entered, press the Exit, then Yes button:

Review the summary and make sure it matches the scale before proceeding to
the next step by pressing the right arrow in the left pane.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 64 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.4.13 Data sheet Step 9, select zerolevel method


For data sheet calibration there are two different ways to acquire the zero
level.
 By connecting either a (empty) scale or loadcell simulator and
measure the current zero level. The measured input will be used as a
zero level reference.
 By entering the estimated dead load of the scale and only perform a
theoretical calculation of the zero level (scale or loadcell simulator
does not need to be connected). This will give a course zero level
unless the exact dead load is know with high accuracy, however the
zero level can be re-acquired once the scale is connected and empty.

Select ‘Measure’ if you have a simulator, empty scale or unloaded loadcell


connected.
Select ‘Calculate’ if you want to calculate the zero level from entering the
estimated/calculated dead load of the scale platform.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 65 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.4.14 Data sheet Step 10-1, Measure scale zero level


When you have an unloaded, scale or loadcell simulator connected, press the
Set Zerolevel button.

When the zero level has been successfully acquired, the calibration sequence
will automatically proceed to the next step.
7.4.15 Data sheet Step 10-2, Calculate scale zero level
To calculate zero level, enter the deadload of the scale platform into the field,
then press the next button.
The value entered will be used as a zero level reference and respond to
displayed weight value of zero.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 66 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.4.16 Data sheet Step 11, Preview calibration result, save settings
Before the calibration is accepted and the settings are saved, the preliminary
result can be reviewed. The weight is shown with increased resolution (10x)
to give an indication of the quality of the calibration. The current input signal
from the scale (loadcells) as mV/V is also shown. The operator can now
choose to either accept the setting by pressing the <Save settings> button, or
to go back to redo any of the previous steps by pressing the left arrow on the
left panel.
If the calibration has been done by calculation and/or loadcells are not
connected then the displayed weight and input values have no relevance.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 67 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.5 Graphic analyser tool


As an aid during scale installation, the weight indicator has a powerful graph
analyzing tool that can be used to assess vibration and signal integrity.
However, due to the powerful nature of the tool, it is only accessible while
calibration mode is activated on the indicator (see separate section). The
function can be found on the second button panel. See images below:

Start/Stop graph Exit graph tool

Save graph

Delta max/min, click to set y-span

y-span and origin settings Graph, axis-scaling depends on settings

Graph centres on median

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 68 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Show the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) tool

AD settings see separate section

y-axis units

Channels displayed in graph

Settings for save graph Save current settings, requires a new graph-start
to come into affect

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 69 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

7.5.1 FFT analyzing tool


The FFT tool calculates a Fourier transform to discern the frequency
components of the input data. The maximum frequency detected is half of
current sampling rate. Magnitude scale (y-scale) is not fully normalized, i.e.
should only be used for relative measurements.
After changing settings the FFT graph must be restarted.

Start/Stop the FFT graph Exit FFT tool

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 70 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8 Settings editor
The indicator is very versatile and can be setup for most weighing
applications, some settings are set by a dedicated tool such as <Full
Calibration> other requires the use of the so called settings editor.
Also by starting the settings editor, the software version and date of the
indicator can be viewed.
The settings editor is activated by pressing the <Settings editor> button, see
images below:

Settings are then grouped by their associative function:


 <Indicator> contains all settings related to the scale and
meteorological aspect of the indicator. To edit these settings, it
requires calibration mode to be activated.
 <Application> contains all other settings for communication, set-
points and log etc. Some settings may require calibration mode to be
activated.
After settings group is selected, the main settings form is displayed see next
page;
Important: Normally the Exit and Save buttons in the settings editor and
value editors must be pressed for 1 second before the action is performed.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 71 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Navigate in tree
Settings tree Expand/Collapse tree or
Edit setting (if possible)

Settings information Save and exit


pane for selected node
Settings type image

There are different types of settings nodes indicated by the symbol in the tree
view and repeated in bottom right corner of the info pane;
 Collection branch, a group of settings, can also be further nested with
additional branches under current level. Serves only as a container
object, can not be changed or edited.
 Always non editable. Example; calibration weight. These settings
cannot be directly altered by the operator, unless through the use of
dedicated tools.
 Protected access parameters. These settings are normally related to
the meteorological aspect of the indicator. Settings controlling filters,
zero levels etc. These can only be changed when calibration mode is
activated (lock open).
 General access parameters. Settings controlling other portions of the
indicator, such as set-points, communication etc. These settings are
always editable.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 72 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Apart from the different types of settings nodes, each parameter is also of a
specific value type. For example, numeric, string, option etc. Each of these
value types has an associated editor. See images below:
Number editor Text editor

Max. and min. values Input keypad, shift key to Input keypad, shift key to
Parameter info access additional pad Parameter info access capitals pad
Value with unit

Save and exit Value Reset to start value


Reset to start value Exit and Save
Cancel and abort changes

Items collection Item selection

Add new item, or remove Reset to start item


Collection of items selected item Navigate buttons Items (where applicable)

Parameter info Parameter info Exit and Save


Exit and Save
Navigate buttons
Reset to start items

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 73 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Boolean editor Add ComDevice

Exit and Save


Parameter info Name, type and settings

Save and exit Input keypad, shift key to


access capitals pad
Parameter value, ON=True/Yes
Cancel and abort changes

Serialport settings Backlight settings

Exit and Save Time of inactivity until dimming


Com settings Intensity as % when dimmed

Reset to start values


Exit and Save
Cancel and abort
changes

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 74 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.1 Settings, backup and recovery tool


The indicator has a powerful tool for creating backups and recovery points
containing all relevant application and settings data. The tool can create and
restore backups from both internal (local) and external (USB flash disk)
storage.
It’s advisable that the operator always use this tool to create a recovery point
at the end of commissioning or when several parameters have been changed.

! !
Important: Care must be taken when restoring data as incorrect settings will
rend your indicator inoperable. I.e. only restore settings that you know are
compatible with your application.
Note: restoring indicator settings containing meteorological data requires
calibration mode to be active.
To access the tool, start the settings editor:

Then press and hold (minimum 3 seconds) on the text where indicator version
and checksum is displayed:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 75 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.1.1 Settings backup root folders


During backup and restore a folder browser is used, it’s important for the
operator to identify and understand the difference and intended usage of the
various root folders to avoid errors and unwanted operation of the indicator.
Depending on configuration and if USB-Flash drive is connected, the
different root folders are:
USB HD – External USB-flash drive connected to the USB-A port, see
section 10.7. Primarily to be used for external full backups or backup of
single node/parameter.
FlashDisk – Internal non volatile memory used by the indicator. It is not
advised that this is used for full backups; instead use the recovery point
interface.
SD Card – DSD (alibi) memory, an optional SD-Card inside the indicator. It
is not advised that this is used for full backups; instead use the recovery point
interface.
Network – If the indicator is member of a LAN then network resources are
found in this group.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 76 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.1.2 Local recovery point


This group handles internal (local) backups called recovery points. By
internal means that the backups are stored on the internal flash memory.
However, if the indicator is fitted with the optional alibi (DSD) memory then
the created recovery points will automatically be stored on this memory also,
i.e. in the case of indicator hardware failure, the SD-card can be retrieved and
put into a new instrument where the configuration can be restored.
When creating a recovery point, all settings groups and related data are
automatically included.
8.1.2.1 Create a new recovery point
Creating a new recovery point is initiated by pressing the ‘Create’ button in
the Local Recovery Point group, see image below:

When creating the recovery point, a default name is automatically created by


using the current date and time. Additionally the operator can enter a unique
text to be added to the default name so that the recovery point is more easily
identified in the case its need to be used later. When finished entering the
optional text, press the <Ok> button to create the recovery point. After a brief
interval where all data is retrieved and stored, a confirmation is shown, see
image below:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 77 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.1.2.2 Restore recovery point


When a recovery point has been created it can be used to restore the indicator
settings to the exact state it was in when the recovery point was done.
However, when restoring from a previous created recovery point the operator
must choose which of the Indicator or Application settings group to restore.
The Indicator group, containing scale and metrological data, can only be
restored when calibration mode is active. In the case where both need to be
recovered, the operator must perform the recovery process twice, once for
each group.
Important: the recovery process restores all settings in the selected group
without warnings. If the operator is unsure of any important changes made
since the recovery point was created, it’s strongly advised that a safety
backup is created before the restoration process.
To restore the instrument to a previously saved recovery point, press the
<Restore> button in the Local Recovery Point group, see image below:

After the correct recovery point is selected, the settings group must be
selected by highlighting and pressing <Ok> button. Note: IndicatorSettings is
only available when calibration mode is active. After the group is selected
press <Ok> button again, after a brief pause where the settings are restored, a
confirmation is shown. See image below:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 78 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.1.2.3 Delete recovery point


Most often it’s not necessary to keep recovery points that are several
iterations older than the current state. It is then advised that the oldest are
deleted so that the newer, more relevant, are easily picked out and to avoid
filling up the internal flash memory. To delete an old recovery point, press the
<Delete> button in the Local Recovery Point group, see image below:

Select the recovery point that is not needed any more and press <Ok>, a
confirmation is shown where the operator must confirm with <Ok> a second
time before the recovery point is actually deleted. When the deletion process
if finished, a final confirmation is shown, see image below:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 79 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.1.3 External full backup


This group handles backups to and from ‘external’ media. By external means
primarily USB-flash drives; however, although not advised, the operator still
has the option to choose other media such as internal flash memory or the
optional DSD SD-card.
When creating a backup, all settings groups and related data are automatically
included. The backup can later be used to initialize this or another instrument
to the exact same configuration and state this indicator has when the backup
is taken.
Note: Some meteorological data, such as calibration, unless normalized
(contact Flintab for more information) is not entirely exchangeable between
different instruments due to small variations in analogue components.
Therefore it’s advised that scale performance is always verified when
restoring indicator settings from an external media, unless known that the
calibration is relevant to this particular instrument.
8.1.3.1 Create a full backup
An external full backup is initiated by pressing the <Create> button in the full
backup group, see image below:

When creating the backup, a default folder name is automatically created by


using the current date and time. Additionally the operator can edit the name
so that the backup is more easily identified. To edit the name press the <Edit>
button next to the name. See image below:

When finished editing the backup folder name, press the <Ok> button to
return to the folder browser

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 80 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

The operator must select the appropriate root folder and eventual subfolders
by navigating in the folder browser, when finished press the <Exit> button. A
confirmation dialog is shown; press <Yes> if the selection is correct. See
image below:

 

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 81 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.1.3.2 Restore from a full backup


When a full backup has been created it can be used to restore the indicator
settings to the exact state it was in when the backup was done.
However, when restoring from a previous created full backup the operator
must choose which of the Indicator or Application settings group to restore.
The Indicator group, containing scale and metrological data, can only be
restored when calibration mode is active. In the case where both need to be
restored, the operator must perform the restoration process twice, once for
each group.
Important: the restoration process restores all settings in the selected group
without warnings. If the operator is unsure of any important changes made
since the backup was created, it’s strongly advised that a recovery point is
created before restoring from an external full backup.
To restore the instrument to a previously saved backup, press the <Restore>
button in the External Full Backup group, see image below:

Select the settings group to be restored by highlighting and then press the
<Ok> button to open the folder browser. See image below:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 82 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

The operator must select the appropriate root folder and eventual backup
subfolder by navigating in the folder browser, then select the correct settings
file by highlighting, confirm by pressing the <Ok> button. In the confirmation
dialog shown, press <Yes> if the selection is correct. See image below:

 

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 83 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.1.4 Backup settings group


In contrast to recovery points and full backups, this group will only backup
and restore a specific node (including all sub nodes) or a single parameter
from the settings files. I.e. only the selected node branch or parameter will be
saved or restored.
Primarily these backups should be to and from ‘external’ media. By external
means primarily USB-flash drives; however, although not advised, the
operator still has the option to choose other media such as internal flash
memory or the optional DSD SD-card.
Note: Some meteorological data, such as calibration, unless normalized
(contact Flintab for more information) is not entirely exchangeable between
different instruments due to small variations in analogue components.
Therefore it’s advised that scale performance is always verified when
restoring indicator settings from an external media, unless known that the
calibration is relevant to this particular instrument.
8.1.4.1 Create backup for a single node/parameter
A backup of a settings node is initiated by pressing the <Create> button in the
Backup Settings Group, see image below:

 

Select the settings group where the node we want to backup is located by
highlighting and then press the <Ok> button to open the settings browser. See
image below:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 84 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

The settings browser is identical in appearance to the normal settings editor,


however it behaves differently. Instead of allowing edit of parameters, Node
or parameter is selected by highlighting, but when the operator presses
<Exit>, the current selected node, including all sub nodes and parameters,
will be used for the backup. See image below:

After the operator confirms selection by pressing <Yes>, the folder browser is
shown.
The operator must select the appropriate root folder and eventual subfolder by
navigating in the folder browser, when finished press the <Ok> button to
select the folder, then confirm by pressing <Yes> to create the
group/parameter backup. The file name for the backup will be composed of
its full path in the settings file to allow for easy identification in the case it
needs to be used later. See image below:

 

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 85 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.1.4.2 Restore a single node/parameter


After a backup of a single node/parameter has been done, it can be used to
restore/setup that section to the exact state it was in when the backup was
done.
Important: the restoration process restores all settings in the selected group
without warnings. If the operator is unsure of any important changes made
since the backup was created, it’s strongly advised that a recovery point is
created before restoring from the node backup.
To restore a previously saved node/parameter backup, press the <Restore>
button in the Backup Setting Group, see image below:

 

The operator must select the appropriate root folder and eventual subfolder by
navigating in the folder browser. Finally select the backup file of the node to
be restored and press <Exit>. Confirm opening backup file by pressing
<Yes>. Finally accept the replacement of the previous node/parameter by
pressing <Ok>. See image below:

 

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 86 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2 Indicator
This group contains all data relevant to the meteorological function of the
internal, external and virtual indicators. Such as calibration data, weighing
unit, filters etc. To edit these settings, most parameters requires calibration
mode to be activated (protected access). However some settings are only set
by an associated tool or read-only.
8.2.1 PrimaryIndicator
The parameter PrimaryIndicator works like a shortcut to an internal, external
or virtual indicator. I.e. once all indicators have been created (see following
sections) this parameter can be setup to point to the indicator that will be
selected on start-up.
In addition, the PrimaryIndicator shortcut can be used everywhere where an
indicator must be selected. This means that, changing the PrimaryIndicator,
will also change the indicator for all modules that are using the shortcut.
See example below, initially PrimaryIndicator is set to Sum1, if we change
PrimaryIndicator to Int1; the source for Setpoint1 will also be indirectly
changed:
Initial Setting Internal Indicators
Setpoint1 module Indicator->PrimaryIndicator Indicator->Sum1
Indicator = PrimaryIndicator PrimaryIndicator = Sum1 Sum1 = Int1 + Int2

New Setting
Indicator->PrimaryIndicator Indicator->Int1
PrimaryIndicator = Int1 Int1 = Channel1

Indicator->Int2
Int2 = Channel2

Note: The only module that is default set to use the PrimaryIndicator is the
Communication->Protocol->Flintab->Proto1.

Parameter / Tool Data Values Comment


type
Default
PrimaryIndicator Option Which internally accessible
indicator is bound to the
PrimaryIndicator shortcut.
Require restart of instrument to
Int1 take affect!

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 87 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.2 NumInternalIndicators
This setting controls how many internal analogue indicators that are to be
activated. By internal means that the scale/loadcells is connected to one of the
four Ad-channels through the loadcell connector on the back panel of the
indicator. Only internal indicators can be legal for trade and pass
verification by a national notified body.
Maximum is four separate indicators. Default is only one indicator, connected
to Ad-channel one. If more indicators are needed, then set this parameter
accordingly, and then restart the instrument before any other changes are
made. After adding new indicator/s and restart of the instrument, each of the
new indicators must run through a full calibration sequence before they can
be used.

Parameter / Tool Data Values Comment


type
Default
NumInternalIndicators 1-4 How many internal indicators to
activate.

Require restart of instrument to


1 take affect!

8.2.3 NumExtIndicators
This setting controls how many external indicators that are to be activated. By
external means that a remote indicator is connected through a communication
media such as serial port or network to the 47-20 instrument. The input from
the remote instrument is then used internally to create a virtual local
indicator. Therefore some limitations apply, such as no means to locally set
zero etc.
Restart of the instrument is required when this setting has been changed.
External indicators cannot be legal for trade.
After adding new indicator/s and restart of the instrument; first the VirtualAD
settings must be setup, then each of the new indicators must run through a full
calibration sequence before they can be used.
Parameter / Tool Data Values Comment
type
Default
NumExternalIndicators 0-6 How many external indicators to
activate.

Require restart of instrument to


0 take affect!

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 88 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.4 NumSumIndicators
This setting controls how many summing indicators that are to be activated.
By summing indicator means that this indicator sums the output from 2 to 8
other local indicators (internal or virtual such as external, sum, flow or pulse)
and creates a new virtual indicator that displays the aggregated sum.
Therefore some limitations can apply such inhibition of setting zero etc.
It is also possible to cascade summing indicators, such that a output from one
summing indicator can be used as input to another summing indicator.
Restart of the instrument is required when this setting has been changed.
Summing indicators cannot be legal for trade.
After adding new indicator/s and restart of the instrument; first the VirtualAD
settings must be setup, then each of the new indicators must run through a full
calibration sequence before they can be used.
Parameter / Tool Data Values Comment
type
Default
NumSumIndicators 0-6 How many summing indicators to
activate.

Require restart of instrument to


0 take affect!

8.2.5 NumPlaybackIndicators
This setting controls if a single playback indicator is to be available. By
playback means that this indicator will use a file as input data, the file should
previously been acquired by using the WeightBuffering mode in one of the
InternalIndicators. The playback indicator will then loop the data in the file
to repeatedly simulate the exact sequence of the measured analogue signal.
The playback indicator can then be used to fine-tune filters and other related
parameters without needing to perform a real world weighing sequence.
Restart of instrument is required when this setting has been changed.
Playback indicator cannot be legal for trade.
Parameter / Tool Data Values Comment
type
Default
NumPlaybackIndicators 0-1 How many playback indicators to
activate.

Require restart of instrument to


0 take affect!

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 89 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.6 NumPulseIndicators
This setting controls how many pulse indicators that are to be activated. By
pulse indicator means that the instrument measures accumulated pulses from
a digital input signal and creates a virtual indicator that shows a calculated
weight value based on pulses/volume and density. As a pulse indicator have
no means for ‘unloading’, this means that zero set behaves different from a
normal indicator, a zero set command will reset the pulse indicator so it will
always start at ‘gross’ zero.
Restart of the instrument is required when this setting has been changed.
Pulse indicators cannot be legal for trade.
After adding new indicator/s and restart of the instrument; first the VirtualAD
settings must be setup, then each of the new indicators must run through a full
calibration sequence before they can be used.
Parameter / Tool Data Values Comment
type
Default
NumPulseIndicators 0-6 How many pulse indicators to
activate.

Require restart of instrument to


0 take affect!

8.2.7 NumFlowIndicators
This setting controls how many flow indicators that are to be activated. By
flow indicator means that the instrument measures instantaneous pulses from
a digital input signal and creates a virtual indicator that shows a calculated
weight value based on pulses/volume, density and time. In contrast to the
pulse indicator, that accumulates each pulse, the flow indicator will only
show a value when there is a stream of pulses; the time between two pulses is
translated to an instantaneous flow measurement.
Restart of the instrument is required when this setting has been changed.
Flow indicators cannot be legal for trade.
After adding new indicator/s and restart of the instrument; first the VirtualAD
settings must be setup, then each of the new indicators must run through a full
calibration sequence before they can be used.
Parameter / Tool Data Values Comment
type
Default
NumFlowIndicators 0-6 How many flow indicators to
activate.

Require restart of instrument to


0 take affect!

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 90 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.8 Settings for all indicators


All indicators, internal and virtual, have the same set of basic parameters that
are needed for the correct scaling and functionality of the indicator.
Before being used, all indicators must run trough a full calibration sequence
for virtual indicators the zero and span setting will be skipped automatically.

Parameter / Tool Data Values Comment


type
Default
Enabled Boolean Int1 cannot be disabled, other
indicators can be disabled during
True tests only.
Text String The label or name for this
indicator. Will be displayed on
the main weight display when this
Channel_ indicator is selected.
FullCalibration  Tool for performing a full
calibration sequence according
to section 6.3. I.e. set all scale
parameters, performs a zero level
and span calibration.
Required at least once for each
indicator.
ZeroCalibration  Tool to re-acquire the zero level.
Does not operate on virtual
indicators.
SpanCalibration  Tool to recalculate the span
calibration (using current zero
level).
Does not operate on virtual
indicators.
RefCalibration  Tool for normalizing instrument
with a loadcell simulator (0mV/V
and 1.8mV/V).
OIMLR76 Boolean If true, then other settings such
Parameters with designation: R76 are as filters and zero ranges are
checked automatically when this setting is automatically clamped to comply
true. with international
recommendation OIMLR76.
Virtual indicators cannot change
this setting and are permanently
False set to False.
Decimals 0-3 If decimal point is used and how
Relates to current unit and division size many digits placed after it.
setting.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 91 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

DivisionSize 1..50 The division size used in the


Relates to current unit and decimal point lowest interval (or single). For
setting. multi interval scales it will be
increased one step for each
1 interval.
MaxWeightCapacity Numeric The maximum weight capacity of
Relates to current unit and decimal point the instrument.
setting. 10000
ZeroLevelADCounts Numeric Raw average AD-value for empty
8388608 scale taken by zero setting tool.
CalLevelADCounts Numeric Raw average AD-value for scale
loaded with test weight
CalibrationWeight by calibration
16777214 tool.
ZeroCalLevelOffset Numeric The tare load when performing a
zero level calibration. Can only
be set by using the calibration
0 tools
CalibrationWeight 0-max. The weight used as test weight
Relates to current unit and decimal point during a calibration. Can only be
setting. 10000 set by using the calibration tools.
Interval1WeightStartPoint 0-max The lowest interval breakpoint if
Relates to current unit and decimal point multi interval is used. Zero if no
setting. 0 multi interval is used.
Interval2WeightStartPoint Ival1-max The highest interval breakpoint if
Relates to current unit and decimal point multi interval is used. Zero if
setting. 0 single or dual interval is used.
StableRangeDivisions 0-20 d The maximum amount (peak to
Parameter is given in number of divisions, peak) the weight value can
fractions allowed. deviate during StableCheckTime
R76: max. 1 d 1d to be deemed stable.
PowerOnZeroStableTimeSec 0-60 s Number of seconds the weight
Parameter is given in seconds, fractions value must be stable at power-on
not allowed before the automatic power-on
R76: min. 4 s 4s zero will operate.
StableCheckTimeSec 0-60 s Minimum amount of seconds the
Parameter is given in seconds, fractions weight value must be within
allowed StableRangeDivisions to be
R76: min. 1 s 1s deemed stable.
PowerOnZeroRangePercent ±0-100% How much ±percentage of
Parameter is given as a percentage of maximum capacity the automatic
maximum capacity ( MaxWeightCapacity), power-on zero function is
and used as a symmetric interval, i.e. the allowed to adjust. If the weight
effective range is ± the parameter setting.
value is outside this range the
R76: max. ±10 % automatic power-on zero
function is inhibited, however it
can be manually aborted by the
±10% operator.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 92 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

RunTimeZeroRangePercent ±0-100% How much ±percentage,


Parameter is given as a percentage of accumulated, of maximum
maximum capacity ( MaxWeightCapacity), capacity the semi-automatic and
and used as a symmetric interval, i.e. the automatic zero tracking is
effective range is ± the parameter setting.
allowed to adjust.
R76: max. ±2 % ±2%
NoZeroTrackInCalMode Boolean If true then no zero-tracking is
performed when calibration
mode is activated. Even if
True activated normally.
ZeroTrackingRangeDivisions ±0-100 d How many ±divisions the weight
Parameter is given in number of divisions value can deviate from current
and used as a symmetric interval, i.e. the zero level before the automatic
effective range is ± the parameter setting,
zero-tracking is inhibited.
fractions allowed.
R76: max. ±0.5 d ±0.5d
ZeroTrackingValuesPerSec 0-10 d/s How many divisions, the
Parameter is given in number of divisions automatic zero-tracking, will
per second, fractions allowed. adjust per second when
R76: max. 0.5 d/s 0.5d/s operational.
AllowZeroTracking Boolean If zero tracking is active in
True normal weighing mode.
Unit None, g, The weighing unit used for the
kg, t, lb, current scale. Used as reference
N, kN for many other parameters.
kg
EnableZeroTrackTimeout Boolean If enabled, an internal event is
generated when zero-tracking
has not been operational for a
specific (ZeroTrackTimeout)
interval. Some communication
protocols may use this
True functionality.
ZeroTackTimeout 1-60 min How many minutes without zero-
Parameter is given in number minutes. tracking before an internal event
is generated. Some
communication protocols may
10 min use this functionality.
IsCalibrated Boolean Set to true when the full
calibration tool has successfully
False finished its sequence.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 93 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.8.1 External indicator, VirtualAD


For larger or more complex installations, there can be more than one
weighing instrument in operation. The 47-20 instrument has functionality to
integrate external instruments by connecting to then through a serial
communication media such as RS232,RS485 or Ethernet. In this case an
internal virtual indicator is created called external indicator. Locally this can
then be used as remote display, input to dosing module or part of an
accumulated sum.
Some limitation applies, such as not all indicator supports remote setting of
zero etc.
The VirtualAD group contains parameters that are unique to the external
indicator and are necessary to access the remote instrument, see table below:

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
ExtIndType Option What protocol to use when
communicating with the remote
instrument. I.e. the brand and/or
Flintab type of the instrument.

ComName Option The logical communication


device bound to this protocol.
None See section 8.4.2

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 94 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.8.2 Playback Indicator, VirtualAD


The playback indicator uses a file as AD input data, the file should previously
has been acquired by the weight buffer function of a ‘normal’ analogue
indicator, see section 8.2.8.10 The playback indicator can then playback the
data in the file to simulate the exact sequence of the previously measured
analogue signal.
The VirtualAD group contains parameters that are unique to the playback
indicator and are necessary to define which file to use and the start
conditions.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
FilePath Option The path and filename of the
weight buffer file that is used as
ad-data. Default save path is:
\\FlashDisk\WeightBuffers\
Default file name is:
YYMMDDHHmmss.txt
Only activate during installation
None or performance comparisons.
InputSignal Input Input that will trigger a start
simulation sequence, if set to
none then the VirtualAD will loop
None the file continuously.
SignalState Option Which level of the InputSignal
that starts the playback.
Active

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 95 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.8.3 Summing indicator, VirtualAD


In some cases it’s necessary to have access to both partial weights of the
weighed object (such as axels etc.) and the summed total weight. In these
cases a virtual summing indicator can be created. The summing indicator will
sum and display the value from all the contributing indicators.
The input to the summing indicator can be any of the internal accessible
indicators, virtual or analogue.
Summing indicators can also be staggered such that the output from one
summing indicator can be used as an input to another.
Some limitation applies, such as not all contributing indicators may support
setting of zero etc.
Note: a summing indicator must also perform the full calibration sequence
before it can be used.
The VirtualAD group contains parameters that are unique to the summing
indicator, see table below:

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
NumOfSubIndicators 2-8 Number of indicators
Indicators contributing to the sum.
Require restart of instrument to
2 take affect!.
Ind1 - Ind8 Option References to the internally
accessible indicators that are
None used to calculate the sum.
UseHiRes Boolean If true then the summing
indicator tries to use high
resolution weight when
calculating the sum. In this case,
due to rounding, the sum is more
accurate but can differ from the
summed displayed values of the
True contributing indicators.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 96 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.8.4 Pulse indicator, VirtualAD


For liquid products it is common, instead of having a scale, to use flow
meters to measure the amount of product entering or leaving a vessel. The
flow meter will generate a train of pulses proportional to the amount of
product passing through the meter. The 47-20 instrument has functionality to
integrate the pulses through one of the digital inputs
The pulse indicator is used when the number of pulses accumulated since last
reset is relevant, i.e. the total amount of product that has passed through the
flow meter. Each pulse will add to the accumulated total until the indicator is
reset or a zero set is performed. When no pulses are detected, the weight will
remain at current value.
This type of internal virtual indicator is called pulse indicator. By also setting
the parameters pulses/litre and density, the virtual indicator will show a
weight value proportional to number of pulses that has been accumulated
since last reset or zero set.
The formula used is: Weight = ( NumPulses * Density ) / PPLFactor
The VirtualAD group contains parameters that are unique to the pulse
indicator, see table below:

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
InputSignal Input Which input signal that is used to
connect to the flow meter. In
general the onboard I/O signals
should be used as they support
None higher pulse frequencies.
PPLFactor Numeric How many pulses generated by
the flow meter when 1 litre of the
product has passed. I.e. pulses
1 P/l per litre.
Density Numeric The density of the product in
1 kg/l kg/litre.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 97 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.8.5 Flow indicator, VirtualAD


For liquid products it is common, instead of having a scale, to use flow
meters to measure the amount of product entering or leaving a vessel. The
flow meter will generate a train of pulses proportional to the amount of
product passing through the meter. The 47-20 instrument has functionality to
integrate the pulses through one of the digital inputs
The flow indicator is used when the instantaneous flow is relevant, i.e. the
amount of product that is currently passing through the flow meter. The
indicator will measure the time between two adjacent pulses and translate this
to an instantaneous flow value. I.e. weight/time. When no pulses are detected,
the flow will be zero.
This type of internal virtual indicator is called flow indicator. By also setting
the parameters pulses/litre and density, the virtual indicator will show a
weight/time value proportional to the time between two adjacent pulses.
The formula used is: Weight/s = Density / ( PPLFactor * PulseTime)
The VirtualAD group contains parameters that are unique to the flow
indicator, see table below:

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
InputSignal Input Which input signal that is used to
connect to the flow meter. In
general the onboard I/O signals
should be used as they support
None higher pulse frequencies.
PPLFactor Numeric How many pulses generated by
the flow meter when 1 litre of the
product has passed. I.e. pulses
1 P/l per litre.
Density Numeric The density of the product in
1 kg/l kg/litre.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 98 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.8.6 Loadcells__
Holds data related to data sheet calibration or for virtual indicators a single
loadcell with 1.8mV/V output and capacity set to indicator max capacity.
The settings editor can not be used to change this data, it can only be set by
the FullCalibration tool and data is entered through the associative functions
in the tool.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
RatedOutput_mV_V Option List with rated outputs as mV/V
of all connected loadcells to this
channel.
Numeric
Float
MaximumCapacity Numeric The maximum capacity of one
single loadcell, entered with the
0 same weighing unit as the scale.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 99 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.8.7 ADConverter
Holds parameters related to the effective sampling rate (measuring speed) of
the indicator and final FIR (Finite Impulse Response) filter.
To understand the relevance of the filter and sampling speed, the measuring
chain of the indicator must be visualized. See figure below:
Input x(n)
n=1-4
Decimator 5:1 Moving average FIR1 filter
28800 Hz 5760 Hz
z-1 z-1 z-1
5

∑ 1:1 – 128:128
y(n)

Cascaded averaging decimators

1st ∑ Decimator 2nd ∑ Decimator


variable: variable:
1:1 – 128:1 1:1 – 128:1
5760 Hz
5760 -56 Hz 5760 -0.4 Hz
z(n)

∑ 1-128 ∑ 1-128

Moving average FIR2 filter


5760 -0.4 Hz
z-1 z-1 z-1 5760 -0.4 Hz FIR AD-data Automatic mode

tap
∑ 1:1 -128:128
v(n)

Adaptive IIR filter with pass-through >1:256


Fixed frequency
w(n) decimator

5760 -0.4 Hz
Weight value 5 Hz

z-1 z-1


Indicator Weight display

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 100 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

For a normal non-automatic indicator the full flexibility of the input stage is
not needed and the settings for the filtering- and decimation-blocks are
simplified. The FIR1 filter is fixed at 1:32, following cascaded decimation
stage is set by the parameter ConversionRate. The output from this stage is
the so called effective sampling rate usable by the indicator, and only a subset
of settings for the conversion rate will be available.
For virtual indicators the ConversionRate if default set to 11.25 hz and should
not be changed unless requested by Flintab. This as the stages before the
second FIR filter (FIR2) are virtualized and does not have a real world
analogue.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
ConversionRate 720- Combined settings for the
11.25 Hz cascaded decimation stage to
generate the desired sampling
rate used by FIR2 and following
45 hz stages.

SecondFIR 1-128 The width of the FIR2 moving


average filter in number of
samples. Frequency response
8 depends on ConversionRate.
UseRefTempCal Boolean If normalization data is used. See
RefCalibration tool. When true,
the input data from AD-
converters are ‘normalized’
against a loadcell simulator so
that a specific input signal
False always gives a known AD-value.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 101 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.8.8 IIRFilter___
The IIR (Infinite Impulse Response) filter in the 47-20 indicator is an
advanced adaptive filter with pass-through functionality. It has a very fast
step response yet achieves a level of filtration (damping) comparable to very
wide FIR filters. This filter is not suitable for scales subject to high vibration
and is not used during data collection in automatic weighing mode.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
MinimumPassthrough Ratio Sets the ration of pass-trough in
the filter in 1/256th parts at
maximum filtration. First
parameter is new value and
1:254 second previous value.
FilterSpeed 8..256cnv Maximum number of AD-
conversions after stable before
filter is at maximum level of
filtration. I.e. how fast the filter
32 cnv reaches target value.
StableThresholdValue 0-100 d Maximum number of divisions
Parameter is given in number of divisions, input can differ from output
fractions allowed. before a ramp is detected and
filter adapts by changing filter
1d level.
Enabled Boolean Controls whether the IIR filter is
enabled or bypassed. Virtual
indicators will default set this to
false, i.e. bypass the IIR filter as
True they are normally already filtered.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 102 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.8.9 Automatic
This group contains the settings for the automatic portion of the indicator, at
the moment this functionality is not fully supported and should be considered
experimental. Automatic weighing tests can only be temporarily activated on
the main button panel while calibration mode is activated.
Automatic weighing is only available for normal analogue indicators, not
virtual.
In automatic mode, a data collection sequence is triggered by either a physical
start signal and/or a specific weight level. After a specified time or when a
physical stop signal triggers, the collected data is passed trough a calculation
module to calculate an automatic-mode weight value. The weight value can
then be gain compensated before being displayed or sent on the
communication interfaces.
When used for automatic weighing, a different set of settings for sampling
rate and FIR filters are used after the start trigger. Therefore this group has its
own AdConverter subgroup setting the conversion rate while data collection
is active; see section 8.2.7.6 for explanation of the settings. Normally the
conversion rate is increased during data collection to generate more weight
samples for the calculation modules.
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
StartSignal Input The physical input signal that
triggers a start data collection
sequence. Note: as standard only
None 0-3 are available on the indicator.

StopSignal Input The physical input signal that


triggers a stop data collection
sequence, and calculation of
result. Note: as standard only 0-3
None are available on the indicator.
Start signal edge Option If start should be triggered on
rising or falling edge of the
Falling StartSignal.
Stop signal edge Option If stop should be triggered on
rising or falling edge of the
Rising StopSignal.
Start delay Numeric How many ms after StartSignal
we wait before actually starting
0 ms data collection.
Stop delay Numeric How many ms after StopSignal
we wait before actually stopping
0 ms data collection.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 103 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

DisableSignal Input This signal can be used to inhibit


the start trigger detection. I.e.
None disable automatic weighing.
DisableSignalActiveState Option Which level of the DisableSignal
that inhibits start trigger
Active detection.
MaxWeighingTime Numeric Maximum number of ms data
collection can be active. I.e.
maximum time between start and
stop of the data collection. When
expired, a forced stop trigger is
generated and the weighing
result is calculated. For triglevel
functionality, this parameter sets
5000 ms the normal weighing time.
CalcMethod Option After stop of data collection,
which method is used to
calculate the weighing result. The
difference between the methods
will be covered in an appendix to
this instruction at a later time.
See Calc Params for eventual
Average settings.
Gain 0.9-1.1 All weighing results from the
automatic weighing module can
be multiplied with this gain factor
to adjust for linearity deviations
compared to the non-automatic
weight value. The gain factor is
applied before output of the
1.0 result. Gain=1 = no adjustment.
MinWeighingTime Numeric Minimum number of ms between
a start and stop of a data
collection. If sequence is shorter
an error code is generated
300 ms instead of weight value.
Belt Speed Numeric The speed of the belt on the
0.5 m/s scale in m/s, if applicable.
Start Enabled Boolean If the indicator should start with
the automatic weighing module
activated. Currently not
False supported.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 104 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.8.9.1 Calc Params


This group hold specific settings for the different automatic weighing result
calculation methods. Not all methods have additional settings.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Average  Write to file Boolean When true, a file is generated at
each weighing calculation. The
path is: \\FlashDisk\DynWeights\
And the file name is:
Avg_YYMMDD.HHmmss.txt
Only activate during installation
False or performance comparisons.
Average  Max num of files Numeric Maximum number of files in the
subdirectory (see above) before
the oldest is automatically
5 deleted.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 105 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.8.9.2 Trigglevel
When the scale is not subject to extensive amount of vibration or when the
object to be weighted is much heavier than the dead-load, it can be easier to
use the actual weight value as a trigger for the automatic data collection.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Label String The name of the setpoint, can be
SetPoint- used to aid the operator of the
TriggLevel function it provides.
Enabled Boolean If the automatic data collection is
False triggered by weight level.

OutputSignal Output A output signal that signals when


a data collection is active. I.e.
signal is high after start
condition has triggered and
returns to low after stop
condition. Can be set to <None>
None for trigglevel function.
Setpoint value Numeric The weight value used for
0 triggering a start condition.
Neg hysteresis Numeric The negative hysteresis for the
Setpoint value before resetting
0.5 trigger.
Weight Mode Option If net or gross weight is to be
used for the Setpoint Value
Net comparison.
Active State Active, If trigger is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when activated.
Active

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 106 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.2.8.10 WeightBuffering
This group contains the settings for a weight buffer associated with the
indicator. When enabled the weight buffer will keep a, in-memory, time
limited ‘record’ of the raw analogue values measured by the ad-converter,
then at command (trigger) the content of the buffer can be saved to a file. The
files can then be used by the PlaybackIndicator to evaluate the effect of
various filters and related data, see section 8.2.5 for more information.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Enabled Boolean If this indicator will have a
weight buffer activated. Restart
indicator to
False
BufferCapacity Numeric How many raw ad-values that
should be saved in the buffer
(FIFO), the relative time
depends on the current AD-
1000 conversion rate.
DirectoryPath Option The path to the folder where the
weight buffer will save AD-data
files.
\\FlashDisk\ File names will be:
WeightBuffers YYMMDDHHmmss.txt
MaxFiles Numeric How many buffer files that will
be saved until the oldest one is
10 automatically deleted.
InputSignal Input Which input that will trigger the
None save of the buffer to a file.
SignalState Active, If trigger is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when activated.
Active

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 107 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.3 Application
This group contains miscellaneous settings for the instrument.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
NetConfig  Tool for configuring the IP-
interface. Such as address
and/or DHCP settings.
SetDateTime  Tool for setting date, time and
verifying the functionality of the
on-board RTC (RealTimeClock)
StartForm Option This settings control what
layout the main display will use.
For a standard non-automatic
scale ‘IndicatorForm’ should be
chosen, this is the one covered
IndicatorForm in this instruction.
DataLocation Path Where the application database
for storing recipes, dosing
FlashDisk result etc. is stored.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 108 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.3.1 Log_______
This group contains the settings for the Status Information log (see section
6.3). This log can be configured to log application messages, warnings and
errors. Do not confuse with the weight data recorder log, see section 6.2. The
subgroup Sections contains settings for the type and level of application data
to log.
Normally this log should not be activated; it should only be used by
experienced technicians while analyzing performance or problematic
weighing applications. After changing settings for the application log, the
indicator must be restarted.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
FileName Path Sets the name and location of
\FlashDisk\ the log file. Make sure path
AppLog.txt exists.
MaxSizeKb Numeric Set the maximum size, in
kilobytes, for the log file, when
full the oldest data will be
overwritten. If zero (0) then write
0 kb to log is disabled.
TcpPort Numeric Log messages will also be
available on a TCP port enabling
remote logging; this parameter
sets the port number. If zero (0)
then the TCP log port
0 functionality is not available.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 109 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.3.1.1 Sections_____
This group sets what type and level of information the application log will
store. As default only critical errors are logged.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Default Option General information

Error
Settings Option Information about the settings
Error editor and associated files.
Dynamic Option Information about the automatic
Error indicator operation.
Static Option Information about the non-
Error automatic indicator operation.
Communication Option Information about the
Error communication interfaces.
Anybus Option Information about the fieldbus
Error interface.
Log Option Information about the weight data
Error recorder log.
Dose Option Information about the dosing-
Error module.

The available options for each section are:


 Off – No data is logged.
 Error – Only critical errors are logged.
 Warning – Warnings and critical errors are logged.
 Info – Module information, warnings and critical errors are logged.
 Verbose – Extensive run-time information, module information,
warnings and critical errors are logged.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 110 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.3.2 Alibi______
The indicator has a possibility to add a two digit instrument ID to the alibi
number. This is normally used in installations with several instruments to
discern between the generated alibi numbers. The ID number is displayed in
the DSD reader utility, but should be excluded when entering an alibi
number.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
InstrumentId 00-99 Instrument Id number, used as
alibi prefix for some protocols.
0

8.3.3 WatchDog
Contains settings for supervision logic and a hardware ‘watchdog’ that will
re-start the instrument if detecting an task that takes an abnormal amount of
time (lock).
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
Default->PeriodMs Numeric How often the watchdog must be
signalled, else the watchdog will
enter supervision and take
control of the system. Zero
0 means the watchdog is disabled.
Default->RefreshMs Numeric How long the watchdog will wait
when in supervision mode before
re-starting the system. During
this time critical data will be
1000 ms saved.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 111 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.4 Communication
The indicator has advanced module based communication interfaces; this
means that the communication device (serial port, TCP) is not directly
coupled with the protocol module. The only exception is the Anybus fieldbus
module that always uses serial port COM2 when enabled.
The protocol modules communicates through ‘logical’ devices, by using the
settings editor function AddRemoveDevice, new devices can be added and
coupled with physical hardware interfaces.
Currently there are three different types of protocol modules, Anybus
(fieldbus), Flintab and printout.
 The fieldbus module uses a file for controlling the layout and content
of the data to be exposed on the external fieldbus interface (connected
to COM2). There are several different types of physical fieldbus
interfaces available (Profibus, Modbus Lonworks etc). The fieldbus
protocol (mapping) and interfaces are described in a separate
document.
 The Flintab module uses the standard Flintab protocol (shared
between 47-04 and 47-10 families). It does not use any of the
extended functionality introduced in the 47-10 family.
 Printout has a module for simple totalizing ASCII printing
functionality.
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
AddRemoveDevice  Tool used to add (or remove)
logical communication devices.
After adding a device, it is
configured or changed under the
group Devices. The available
logical devices will be selectable
in the protocol modules.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 112 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.4.1 Protocol__
This group holds the available protocol modules. Further details on the
Anybus (fieldbus) protocol and interfaces are found in document 4-55235
Weightindicator 47-20 fieldbus interface description. The protocol for the
Flintab module is described in Appendix B – Flintab standard protocol. As
the indicator is subject to continuous development, your instrument may have
more protocols available, in such cases consult Flintab for more information.
8.4.1.1 Anybus[COM2]
The Anybus protocol module is to be used with a fieldbus interface board
connected to the (internal) COM2 serial port. The protocol module is not
dependant on the actual hardware interface used. Fieldbus device address
(where applicable) is set through the settings editor but mapping of indicator
data exposed on the fieldbus interface is controlled by parameters read from a
configuration file.
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
SerialNumber Numeric Read only parameter, serial
number taken from Anybus
interface board.
ModuleType String Read only parameter, module
type read from Anybus
interface board.
DeviceAddress Numeric Fieldbus interface device
126 address (where applicable).
Enabled Boolean If the Anybus protocol module
is activated. Note: must also
be activated when using
False native Modbus support.
ResetModule Boolean True, will reset the fieldbus
board when exiting the
False settings editor.
ConfigFile Path Path and name of the protocol
configuration file. See
\FlashDisk\ separate documentation of
DefaultADIConfig file parameters.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 113 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.4.1.2 Flintab___
This protocol module is a legacy ASCII based command-reply protocol,
compatible with previous generations of Flintab indicators (47-04 and
47-10 families). See Appendix B – Flintab standard protocol for details. Up
to eight separate Flintab protocols can be active at the same time.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
NumOfProtocols Numeric How many instances of the
Flintab protocol to create.
Require restart of instrument to
1 take affect!.

8.4.1.2.1 Proto1-Proto8___
Flintab standard protocol is described in Appendix B – Flintab standard
protocol. However some key components are controlled by settings such as
inclusion of weighing unit etc. See table below:

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Enabled Boolean If this protocol is enabled.
Proto1 is default enabled,
True Proto2-8 are default disabled.
ComName Option The logical communication
device bound to this protocol.
Serial1 Proto2-8 are default set to None.
Indicator Option Which of the internal indicators
to bind this protocol. It’s
possible to bind the same
PrimaryIndicator indicator to several protocols.
StartupMode Option Which command that is
automatically injected into the
protocol module at start-up. If
the command starts a
continuous output, the
continuous output will be active
None until another command is
received.
SendUnitEnabled Boolean If weight value should have unit
True attached.
DummyAlibiEnabled Boolean Will generate a dummy alibi
number (9999999) when alibi
memory is not present but host
True request an alibi storage event.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 114 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

IdNumberEnabled Boolean If the two digit indicator ID


number is to be preceding the
alibi sequence number, thus
generating a 9 digit number
True instead of a 7 digit number.
SequenceNumberEnabled Boolean If alibi storage and number
generation is to be active for
automatic weighing. When
enabled each weight generated
in automatic mode will have the
alibi number attached. Note see
True also IdNumberEnabled.
SendWZEnabled Boolean If zero supervision should be
active. When active it will send a
warning message if zero track
has not been performed within
the specified interval. See
section 8.2.7 for information
False about ZeroTrackTimeout.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 115 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.4.1.3 Printout__
This module support simple ASCII printouts. Currently only totalizing
printouts are possible. See also Appendix C – Printout examples.
8.4.1.3.1 Totalizing
The totalizing module supports adding weights to accumulated sum, then at
operator command, print all individual weight values with alibi numbers and
end with the sum value. See section 4.3.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Enabled Boolean If totalizing printouts are
False enabled
IncludeHeader Boolean If the text in Header is
True preceding the printout.
Header String Text that can be used as a
’..=FLINTAB=..’ header for each printout.
IncludeFooter Boolean If the text in Footer is ending
True the printout.
Footer String Text that can be used as
’..=VÅGAR footer for each printout.
SYSTEM=..’
IncludeAlibiNumbers Boolean If alibi numbers should be
True included in the printout.
IncludePartWeights Boolean If each part weight should be
True included in the printout.
ComName Option The logical communication
None device bound to this protocol.
CodePage Option The codepage to be used for
the printout. For example; sets
how international characters
are translated and transmitted
850 to the printer.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 116 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.4.1.4 PrintLog___
This module support simple ASCII line based printouts for example used
when dosing and/or batching.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Log->Enabled Boolean If log printer is enabled
False
Log->IncludeHeader Boolean If the text in Header is
True preceding the printout.
Log->Header String Text that can be used as a
’..=FLINTAB=..’ header for each printout.
Log->IncludeFooter Boolean If the text in Footer is ending
True the printout.
Log->Footer String Text that can be used as
’..=VÅGAR footer for each printout.
SYSTEM=..’
Log->UseFormFeed Boolean If, when LinesPerPaper has
been printed a <FF> (0x0C)
command is sent to the printer
False automatically.
Log->LinesPerPaper Numeric How many lines can fit onto
one sheet of paper, controls
when formfeed is sent, see
72 above.
Log->LeftMargin Numeric Number of spaces (empty
characters) to the left of
4 printed data.
Log->TopMargin Numeric How many empty lines printed
0 at the top of each new paper.
Log->BottomMargin Numeric How many empty lines printed
0 at the bottom of each paper.
Log->ComName Option The logical communication
None device bound to this protocol.
Log->CodePage Option The codepage to be used for
the log printert. For example;
sets how international
characters are translated and
850 transmitted to the printer.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 117 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.4.1.5 Toledo8530
This protocol emulates the indicator protocol most often referred to as Toledo
Continuous used by the company Mettler Toledo. Toledo8530 is one of the
instruments using this protocol but many other instruments and software
packages are also supported.
For a more detailed description of the protocol see Toledo 8530 service
manual.
8.4.1.5.1 Proto1-Proto8
Parameters for setting up the Toledo8530 continuous protocol emulation:

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Enabled Boolean If the Toledo8530 protocol
False handler is enabled
ComName Option The logical communication
None device bound to this protocol.
Indicator Option Which of the internal
indicators to bind this
protocol. It’s possible to bind
the same indicator to several
PrimaryIndicator protocols.
StartupMode Option The protocol can operate in
two modes, request where
the weight is only sent at
command ( ENQ) or
Continous continuous.
UseSetpointStatusByte Boolean Controls the meaning of
False encoded bits in status word
A:3-6 and C:4
UseChecksumChar Boolean If checksum (2’s complement
low order 7 bit sum full
True telegram) is to be included.
AllowCmdInput Boolean Allows command input from
external system, must be True
Flase when Startupmode=request.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 118 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.4.1.6 Modbus___
The indicator has a limited native Modbus support when not using a
dedicated Anybus hardware module. By limited means that only a small
subset of the available commands are implemented. Currently the only
following function codes are acknowledged:
• 0x03 – Read holding registers
• 0x05 – Write single coil
• 0x06 – Write single register
• 0x10 – Write multiple registers
To enable native Modbus the Anybus[COM2] fieldbus module must also be
activated, see section 8.4.1.1 (Enabled). Native Modbus and dedicated
fieldbus module will always share the same address (ID), see 8.4.1.1
(DeviceAddress).
Typical response time is <100ms.
For more information about fieldbus and Modbus see 4-55235
Weightindicator 47-20 fieldbus interface description.
8.4.1.6.1 Proto1-Proto8
Parameters for setting up native Modbus support:
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
Enabled Boolean If this native Modbus handler is
False enabled.

ComName Option The logical communication


device (port/socket) bound to
None this protocol.
RTUMode Boolean If the Modbus protocol will use
True RTU (binary) or ASCII mode.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 119 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.4.2 Devices____
This group contains all available logical communication devices. Adding or
removing devices is done through the AddRemoveDevice tool.
The indicator has three serial ports (COM1-3), USB and Ethernet hardware
interfaces, logical devices for COM1 and COM3 are always created at factory
reset, COM2 is normally reserved to be used by fieldbus module. However if
the Anybus fieldbus module is disabled, COM2 can also be used to create a
logical communication device. Other logical devices using USB and Ethernet
as medium communicates by using TCP as either a host or slave and needs to
be added when required.
Additionally basic USB printer support is included, if a USB printer is
available during start of the instrument, a device labelled ‘USB
Printer1:LPT1’ is added to the list of available devices. Note: the port
designation (LPT1) can vary between installations.
As this functionality means that the operator can add their own devices, the
parameter table below only provides information about the factory default
devices, these cannot be removed.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
None - Dummy device will disable
communication for the module
where it’s used.
Serial1 Option Physical port COM1 and
communication settings,
9600,8,1, baudrate, databits, stopbits and
None parity.
Serial3 Option Physical port COM3 and
communication settings,
9600,8,1, baudrate, databits, stopbits and
None parity.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 120 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.5 UserInterface
This group holds the parameters for the visual appearance and functionality of
the button panels.
8.5.1 Display___
Settings for automatic backlight dimming and display-plugin.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
BackLightWakeupSource Option Which events that wakes
backlight when dimming is active.
All Require restart of instrument to
events take affect!.
BacklightSettings  Tool to set when and how much
backlight is automatically
dimmed after the weight has been
stable and no operator input has
been detected for a
predetermined time.
DisplayPlugIn Option The plug-in module visible on the
IO Status weight display. See section 2.1.1

8.5.2 MapIoToFunction___
This group contains parameters for using digital inputs to activate weighing
functions such as zero setting, tare etc.
Note: When using inputs to activate instrument functions, weighing related
functions will operate on the default indicator however functions starting
various modules, such as dosing and quick setpoints etc., will operate on the
currently selected indicator. This means that this function is dubious when
multiple indicators are accessible. In this case, use with caution.
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
NumOfMapIoFunction Numeric How many weighing functions we
want to control by input signals.
Require restart of instrument to
0 take affect!.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 121 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

For each I/O mapped to function the following settings are required:
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
1-16 Default
Enabled Boolean If this mapped I/O is active.
False
Function Option Which function to activate when
the input signal is detected. Will
always operate on the default
indicator.
Note: some functions may require
None calibration mode to be active.
Signal Option The signal that will activate the
IO Signal function.

Note: Some functions are not suited to be externally controlled, it’s up to the
installer to assess and determine if a specific mapped I/O gives the desired
outcome.
8.5.3 Buttons___
Parameters controlling the behaviour and functionality of the button panels.
Most settings require calibration mode to be active as they control which
functions that are available to the operator, this is not allowed to be changed
after verification by a notified body.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
DefaultPanel Option The default button panel. After
timeout this is the panel that will
Standard always be selected.
ButtonPanelTimeout Numeric Number of seconds without
operator input before the button-
60 s panel is switched to default.
ButtonAutoLock Numeric Number of seconds without
operator input until buttons are
300 s locked.
DisabledPanels Option The button panels that are
Test- disabled and not visible to the
panels3,4 operator.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 122 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

AlwaysOnKeys Option Buttons that needs to be


PowerOn- active even during power-on-
ZeroAbort zero or other similar events.

AlwaysOffKeys Option Buttons that are permanently


TestFunction disabled.
CalModeKeys Option Buttons that require
calibration mode to be active
before being enabled.
Note: this setting only controls
the visual indication of the on-
screen buttons, it is not
possible to activate, for
CalibrationFull, example, full calibration tool
WaveForm, unless calibration mode is
ToggleAuto active.

8.5.4 PowerOn___
For some installations it’s desirable that the indicator always start with a
specific function activated such as dose module etc. This parameter will
execute the selected function as soon as the power-on sequence is finished on
the PrimaryIndicator.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
StartFunction Option This function will be activated as
soon as the power-on and
power-on zero setting is finished
or aborted. Always operate on
None the PrimaryIndicator.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 123 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.6 SetPoints
Setpoints are used when a digital signal state should relate to a specific
weight level, i.e. change their status when a certain weight level has been
reached. It can for example be used for simple dosing or overweight
detection.
Setpoints can operate on any available external I/O or memory markers. See
section 9 Instrument digital I/O for more details and examples of using the
I/O facilities of the instrument.
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
NumOfSetPoints Numeric How many software setpoints to
activate.
Require restart of instrument to
0 take affect!.

8.6.1 SP1 to SP16


Each of the set points has the same settings that define the level and
functionality of the set point trigger.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Label String A logical name for the setpoint,
can be used to couple with the
external function invoked when
Setpoint# active.
Enabled Boolean If the set point is enabled. When
set to disabled, it leaves eventual
False output signal to current state.
Indicator Option Which indicator is used to
Int1 compare with setpoint value.
Setpoint value Numeric The weight level that triggers the
0 set point.
Output signal Option Which output signal that is
None controlled by this set point value.
Neg hysteresis Numeric How much the weight level must
be under set point value before
Output signal is released after
0.5 being triggered.
Weight mode Option If set point value is compared
Gross against gross or net weight.
Active State Active, If setpoint is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when;
Active weight > setpoint value.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 124 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.7 Conveyor
During tests the indicator can be setup to control a conveyer system so that a
parcel/object can be continuously driven back and forth over the system. This
allows, for example, a conveyer with an integrated scale to be used for
automatic weighing repeatedly with the same weight. This group controls the
settings for this functionality.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
ForwardSignal Option Which output signal that is active
when conveyer should run
None ‘forward’
ReverseSignal Option Which output signal that is active
when conveyer should run
None ‘backwards’
ToggleDelay Numeric Wait between switching
0 ms backwards and forwards.
Enabled Boolean If conveyer control is active.
False

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 125 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.8 PLC______
For larger installations or installations with special requirements a simple
digital I/O interface is most often not sufficient. To provide necessary safety
interlocks and I/O flexibility the instrument has a PLC (Programmable Logic
Controller) group.
The group consists of various logic building blocks that operate on digital I/O
signals similar to PLC ‘ladder’ programs.
Additional examples of usage and more information about I/O’s are
found in section 9 Instrument digital I/O.
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
NumOfLadders Numeric How many PLC ‘ladder’ blocks to
create.
A single ladder block, can
logically bind up to 16 individual
I/O signals with selectable AND,
OR or INV logic to one single
output.
Require restart of instrument to
0 take affect!
NumOfSRFlipFlops Numeric How many SetReset FlipFlops to
create.
A SetReset FlipFlop is a stored
state gate with optional delays
for both set and reset events.
Can be used to generate a single
pulse from an input signal.
Require restart of instrument to
0 take affect!
NumOfTFlipFlops Numeric How many Toggle FlipFlops to
create.
A Toggle FlipFlop is a stored
state gate which toggles its state
at each set event.
Can be used when a single input
shall be used for both start and
stop events.
Require restart of instrument to
0 take affect!
NumOfIndicatorLadders Numeric How many IndicatorLadders to
create.
An IndicatorLadder logically
binds indicator status, such as
stable, zero etc. to digital I/O’s.
Also has ladder functionality.
Require restart of instrument to
0 take affect!.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 126 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.8.1 Ladder, PLC ladder block


The Ladder object provides functionality very similar to PLC ladder block
logic.
Each Ladder object can handle up to 16 separate I/O states/signals, called
Conditions, bound logically to control one single output.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
LabelText String An installation specific optional
name/label for this Ladder
block.
Is not used internally.
It’s advisable to name the block
so that it reflects the
PLC.Gate.X functionality it provides.
OutputSignal Option Which output signal the ladder
None block will control.
ActiveState Active, If output is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when;
Active ladder output is true.
NumOfConditions Numeric How many I/O signals or logical
operations this ladder block will
evaluate.
Require restart of instrument to
2 take affect!.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 127 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.8.1.1 Ladder, Conditions


The instrument will evaluate the logical conditions top to bottom, i.e. starts
with Condition_0 then evaluate Condition_1 etc.
Each Condition, has two parameters:
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
Function Option Logical operation similar to
ladder PLC programs.
Condition_0 must always start
Begin (0) / with Begin (default) or
None BeginInverted. See table below.
Signal Option Which signal the logical
None operation will evaluate.
Not applicable for block
functions AndBlock and
OrBlock.

The basic logical operations that can be evaluated on signal pairs, or sub-
blocks of signals are:
AND – Output true if all inputs are true.
OR – Output true if one of the inputs is true.
NOT – Output is true if input is false.
Some operations are combined, see table below of available functions, PLC
equivalents and comments:
Function PLC Comment
equivalent

None - Empty function, does nothing.


Begin LD Begins a logical block. Condition_0 must have
LOAD this function or BeginInverted.
Initial state = Signal_0.
BeginInverted LDI Begins a logical block with inverted state.
LOADInverse Condition_0 must have this function or Begin.
Initial state = NOT(Signal_0).
And AND Performs logical AND on previous state and
Signal State. Serial coupling.
New State = PrevState AND Signal_X
AndInverted ANI Performs logical NAND on previous state and
ANDInverse Signal State. Serial coupling with inverted output.
New State = NOT( PrevState AND Signal_X)

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 128 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Or OR Performs logical OR on previous state and Signal


State. Parallel coupling.
New State = PrevState OR Signal_X
OrInverted ORI Performs logical NOR on previous state and
ORInverse Signal State. Parallel coupling with inverted
output.
New State = NOT( PrevState OR Signal_X )
AndBlock ANB Performs a AND of two blocks. Serial coupling of
AND Block blocks. Blocks start with Begin or BeginInverted.
Does not use the Signal parameter.
OrBlock ORB Performs an OR of two blocks. Parallel coupling of
OR Block blocks. Blocks start with Begin or BeginInverted.
Does not use the Signal parameter.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 129 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.8.1.2 Ladder, examples


Example 1:
OutputSignal = ((Input_0 OR Input_1) AND (Marker_0 OR (NOT(Marker_1)))) OR
Input_2
Equivalent ladder diagram:

Input_0 Marker_0
Ladder
Output
Input_1 Marker_1

Input_2

For this we need a ladder with 6 conditions, according to table below:

Condition Parameters Setting Comment

Condition_0 Function Begin, Start Block1


Signal Input_0
Condition_1 Function Or Block1 = Input0 OR Input_1
Signal Input_1
Condition_2 Function Begin Start Block2
Signal Marker_0
Condition_3 Function OrInverted Block2 = Marker_0 OR
(NOT(Marker_1))
Signal Marker_1
Condition_4 Function AndBlock Block1 AND Block2
Signal None -
Condition_5 Function Or Output = (Block1 AND Block 2)
OR Input_2
Signal Input_2

Second example on next page:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 130 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Example 2:
OutputSignal = ((Input_0 AND Marker_0) OR (Input_1 AND (NOT(Marker_1)))) OR
(Input_2 AND Input_3))
Equivalent ladder diagram:

Input_0 Marker_0
Ladder
Output
Input_1 Marker_1

Input_2 Input_3

For this we need a ladder with 8 conditions, according to table below:


Condition Parameters Setting Comment

Condition_0 Function Begin, Start Block1


Signal Input_0
Condition_1 Function And Block1 = Input_0 AND
Marker_0
Signal Marker_0
Condition_2 Function Begin Start Block2
Signal Input_1
Condition_3 Function AndInverted Block2 = Input_1 AND
(NOT(Marker_1))
Signal Marker_1
Condition_4 Function Begin Start Block3
Signal Input_2
Condition_5 Function And Block3 = Input_2 AND Input_3
Signal Input_2
Condition_6 Function OrBlock OutputTmp = Block2 OR
Block3
Signal None
Condition_7 Function OrBlock Output = Block2 OR Block3
OR Block1
Signal None

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 131 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.8.2 SRFlipFlop, Set/Reset block with timers


A SRFlipFlop is a set / reset stored state gate with optional delays for both set
and reset events.
By stored state means that after a set event the gate will hold the output in
true state until a reset event is triggered.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
LabelText String An installation specific
optional name/label for this
SRFlipFlop block.
Is not used internally.
It’s advisable to name the
block so that it reflects the
PLC.SRFlipFlop.X functionality it provides.

8.8.2.1 SRFlipFlop, parameters


The SRFlipFlop has two inputs, set and reset, and one output. Both the set
and reset events can be delayed by a freely chosen time interval.
The set event will set the gate output into its true state, and the reset event
will set the output into its false state.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Output->Signal Option Which signal the SRFlipFlop will
None use as output.
Output->ActiveState Active, If output is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when;
Active SRFlipFlop output is true.
Set->Signal Option Which signal that will set the
None SRFlipFlop output to true.
Set->Edge Option Which edge of the set input
signal that will trigger the set
Rising event. Rising= low to high.
Set->Delay Numeric The delay inserted after the set
event before the output changes
0 ms to its true state.
Reset->Signal Option Which signal that will reset the
None SRFlipFlop output to false.
Reset->Edge Option Which edge of the reset input
signal that will trigger the reset
Rising event. Rising= low to high.
Reset->Delay Numeric The delay inserted after the
reset event before the output
0 ms changes to its false state.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 132 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.8.2.2 SRFlipFlop, examples


Example 1:
One second after Input_0 positive edge activate Output_0, then deactivate
Output_0 on negative edge Input_1:
State diagram:

Input_0

Input_1

1000 ms
Output_0

Settings:

SRFlipFlopGate Parameters Setting Comment

Output Signal Output_0 The output we want to control


ActiveState Active We want output to be high
during the pulse.
Set Signal Input_0 The input triggering the pulse
Edge Rising We want to trig on positive,
rising edge.
Delay 1000 ms We want to start the pulse
1000ms after set event
triggers.
Reset Signal Input_1 The input we want to reset the
output.
Edge Falling Trig reset event on negative,
falling edge.
Delay 0 ms We want to trig reset event
without delay.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 133 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Example 2:
A two second pulse on Output_0 triggered by Input_0 positive edge:
State diagram:

Input_0

Output_0 2000 ms

Settings:
SRFlipFlopGate Parameters Setting Comment

Output Signal Output_0 The output we want to control


ActiveState Active We want output to be high
during the pulse.
Set Signal Input_0 The input triggering the pulse
Edge Rising We want to trig on positive,
rising edge.
Delay 0 ms We want to start the pulse
when the set event triggers
without delay.
Reset Signal Input_0 We want to have the reset
event triggered at the same
time set event occurs and by
the same input.
Edge Rising Trig reset event on positive,
rising edge.
Delay 2000 ms Delay the SRFlipFlop output
reset to low, by 2000 ms.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 134 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.8.3 TFlipFlop, Toggle block


A TFlipFlop is a toggling stored state gate.
By stored state means that after a set event the gate will hold the output in
current state until a new set or reset event is triggered.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
LabelText String An installation specific
optional name/label for this
TFlipFlop block.
Is not used internally.
It’s advisable to name the
block so that it reflects the
PLC.TFlipFlop.X functionality it provides.

8.8.3.1 TFlipFlop, parameters


The TFlipFlop has two inputs, set and reset, and one output.
The set event will toggle the gate output into the inverse of its current state,
i.e. NewState = NOT(CurrentState).
The reset event will always set the output into its false state.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Output->Signal Option Which signal the TFlipFlop will
None use as output.
Output->ActiveState Active, If output is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when;
Active TFlipFlop output is true.
Set->Signal Option Which signal that will toggle the
None TFlipFlop output.
Set->Edge Option Which edge of the toggle input
signal that will trigger the toggle
Rising event. Rising= low to high.
Reset->Signal Option Which signal that will always
None reset the TFlipFlop output to
false.
Reset->Edge Option Which edge of the reset input
signal that will trigger the reset
Rising event. Rising= low to high.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 135 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.8.3.2 TFlipFlop, examples


Example 1:
Toggle Ouput_0 on each Input_0 positive edge, reset on Input_1 negative
edge:
State diagram:

Input_0

Input_1

Output_0

Settings:

SRFlipFlopGate Parameters Setting Comment

Output Signal Output_0 The output we want to control


ActiveState Active We want output to be low after
a reset event. And high (active)
after first set event.
Set Signal Input_0 The input triggering the toggle
event.
Edge Rising We want to trig on positive,
rising edge.

Reset Signal Input_1 The input we want to reset the


output. To the inverse of
Output->ActiveState.
Edge Falling Trig reset event on negative,
falling edge.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 136 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.8.4 IndicatorLadder, PLC ladder with indicator states


The IndicatorLadder object provides functionality very similar to PLC ladder
block logic but primarily operates on internal indicator states such as stability,
zero etc.
Each IndicatorLadder object can handle up to 16 separate Indicator
states/signals, called Conditions, bound logically to control one single output.
For example of usage see section 8.8.1 Ladder, PLC ladder block. The only
difference being that the inputs for IndicatorLadder are indicator flags instead
of general digital I/O.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
LabelText String An installation specific optional
name/label for this Ladder
block.
Is not used internally.
It’s advisable to name the block
so that it reflects the
PLC.Gate.X functionality it provides.
OutputSignal Option Which output signal the ladder
None block will control.
ActiveState Active, If output is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when;
Active ladder output is true.
Indicator Option Which Indicator that will be used
Int1 – as a reference for this
Channel 1 IndicatorLadder.
NumOfConditions Numeric How many indicator flags or
logical operations this ladder
block will evaluate.
Require restart of instrument to
2 take affect!.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 137 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.9 FileLogs
During installation or weighing performance analysis it is sometimes
necessary to use a weight data recorder, i.e. a log apparatus. The weight
indicator comes equipped with a versatile file log module that allows logging
of weight values and related status information.
8.9.1 DefaultLog
This log stores data as ASCII data in a text file, the file should be located on a
non-volatile media such as ‘FlashDisk’ (internal) or USB drive. When
logging is done, the file should be transferred to PC for reviewing.
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
StartEnabled Boolean If the log should automatically
False start when indicator starts.
LogDirectory Path The path to where the log file will
be created. Use ‘\FlashDisk\’ to
use the internal memory, or
\FlashDisk\ ‘\USB HD\’ for USB memory.
LogFileName String The name of the log file. The
module will automatically
DefaultLog append the extension ‘log’.
AppendExistingLog Boolean If an existing file is found, then
True we add new data at the end.
OverwriteExistingLog Boolean If a file is already found, we
delete it and create a new empty
False file.
CreateInfoFile Boolean If true an additional file named
LogFileName but with extension
‘txt’ will be created when log
starts. This file contains current
False indicator settings for filters etc.
ObjectsToLog Option Collection of items that will be
logged. The order of the items is
also given. For example: Time,
Time, Max. gross weight, Avg. gross
MaxGross, weight etc. These items will all
AvgGross, be logged as a single line at
MinGross, each log event, see also
NumSamp. LogSeparator.
ResetAvgEachLogEvent Boolean If the running average variables
should be reset when a log
event expires. Note: average is
calculated for every weight
update even if actual logging
False events are further apart.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 138 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

ResetMaxMinEachLogEvent Boolean If max. and min. variables should


be reset (set to current) at each
log event. Note: max. and min.
are calculated for every weight
update even if actual logging
events are further apart.
False
LogOnlyAfterUnstable Boolean When a log event triggers, we
only write to log file if the scale
has been unstable since last log
False event.
NumEventsAfterStable Boolean When LogOnlyAfterUnstable is
true, scale has been unstable
and returned to stable, we log
this many times before we wait
10 for unstable again.
LogDataRate Numeric If zero then the timer,
LogDataTimer is used instead to
trigger the log events. For other
values, this parameters sets
number of updates between each
log event. See AdConverter->
ConversionRate section 8.2.7.6
for current update rate. Note: log
0 rates > 50hz are not supported.
LogDataTimer Numeric If LogDataRate is zero, this
parameters sets number of
milliseconds between each log
event. Note: log rates > 50hz are
1000 ms not supported
TimeIncludeMilliSecs Boolean If time object is included in
ObjectToLog, this parameters
sets if the time should have a
False millisecond timestamp.
MaxFileSize_kb Numeric The maximum size of the log file,
when reached, the log will be
stopped. If file is already at
maximum size and
AppendExistingLog is true, the
100 kb log never starts.
MaxLoggedEvents Numeric If zero then this parameters has
no function. For other values, this
parameter sets maximum number
of events that will be logged.
0
LogSeparator String The character/s that will be put
<Semi- between each object in the log
colon> file.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 139 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10 Dose_____
Dose modules are advanced versatile function blocks for dosing or batching a
single product to or from a container. Batching refers to when multiple dosing
cycles are automatically run in sequence until a preset accumulated (batch)
sum is reached.
For dosing of multiple products, see RecipeDose.
In contrast to a simple setpoint setup, a dose module has features to
compensate for variation in flow, overswing and inflight parameters. The
module also has an automatic tare or alternatively a zero check function. To
adapt the module to a specific installation, various settings need to be
configured. It’s advised that the dose parameter checklist, is used as a guide
during installation.
When all parameters are correctly setup, only the target value needs to be
changed between dosing cycles.
Note: Operational parameters such as target weight and batch weight are
normally set outside the settings editor through the use of dedicated tools.
Therefore, only system configuration parameters such as inputs/outputs,
limits and time intervals needs to be setup through the setting editor.
The 47-20 indicator can have several dosing or batching modules activated,
each operating on either the same or separate scales. Each module will dose
one single product.
Note: When RecipeDose is used, i.e. dosing of multiple products with
parameters from a recipe, the first dose module (Dose1) is required and used
by the RecipeDose as a framework for dosing functionality. However the
settings in the dose module will then be dynamically overridden by data taken
from the recipe database.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
NumOfDoses Numeric How many separate dose
modules that should be active.
RecipeDose requires that Dose1
is available and not used for
normal dosing.
Require restart of instrument to
0 take affect!.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 140 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

See figure below for an example of a full function dosing cycle:

m PostDose (optional)

Fine dose Value


Inflight Value

Target Value
Stop dosing

Stop course dosing

Flow control

t
Pre-Start check
Start
Check zero / Calculate tare
Pre-fill / Fine-fill
Course fill delay
Course fill
Overswing control
Inflight delay
Calc. weight. and inflight correction
Ready
Empty
(Pre-Start check)

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 141 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.1 LogSettings
This group contains settings for the dose or batch database. When activated,
each dose or batch cycle, will save the weight results into a database. The
database can then later be reviewed or transferred to a computer system for
statistical analyses.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
LogEvent Option What data will be saved in the
database. Only dose results,
None only batch results or both.
SaveDays Numeric How long to keep stored data in
the database. After the set time,
old data will be automatically
90 Days removed.
PrinterHeader String The header used for the log
<Change> printer (if enabled).

8.10.2 Dose_____
This group and subgroups contain the parameters for the product to be dosed
or batched.
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
Enabled Boolean If the dose module is active.
True
Indicator Option Which indicator (scale) is used
None for dosing.
IsBatchMode Boolean If this module should be used for
False batching.
DoseIn Option If dosing should be into (DoseIn)
or out from (DoseOut) from the
Dose In scale.
DoseValue Numeric The dose target weight, will
normally be set outside the
1 (kg) settings editor.
MinDoseDivisions Numeric The minimum number of divisions
5d that is allowed to dose.
AllowBackgroundDose Boolean When using the Dose module
interface tool, see section 5.1. If
the dose module is allowed to
keep running in the background
False even if we exit the tool.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 142 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.1 DoseModuleStarted
It is possible to have a dedicated output signal indicating that the dose module
is running. I.e. this signal does not indicate active dosing, only that the
module controlling dose has started and is running.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Output->Signal Output Which output that will be set to
true when the dose module has
None started.
Output->ActiveState Active, If output is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when;
Active Output state is true.

8.10.2.2 Batch______
If this module is set to batch mode ( IsBatchMode = true, see previous page)
then the parameters in this group are valid.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
BatchDoseValue Numeric The target value for batching. Is
normally set outside the setting
0 (kg) editor.
LastDoseOverfill Numeric How much that is allowed to
overshoot target for the last dose
in a batch. If set to zero then no
overshoot is allowed and the last
dose will be divided into two
(half) doses if the remainder is
5d above target.
IsBatching->Output->Signal Output Which output that will be set to
true when batching is active.
None
IsBatching->Output->ActiveState Active, If output is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when;
Active Output state is true.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 143 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.3 Start_____
Input signal that triggers a start dose cycle, if not used set to <None>. This
signal should be removed before the dosing cycle has finished avoiding an
unintended re-start.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
InputSignal Input Input signal to trigger a start
None dose sequence.
SignalState Active, In which state the signal triggers.
NotActive
Active

8.10.2.4 Stop_____
Input signal that triggers a stop dosing cycle, if not used set to <None>. The
stop signal de-activates course and fine outputs and calculates the weight that
was dosed when stop condition occurred; the dosing cycle is then ended.
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
InputSignal Input Input signal to trigger a stop
None dose sequence.
SignalState Active, In which state the signal triggers.
NotActive
Active

8.10.2.5 Pause_____
Input signal that triggers a pause in the dosing cycle, if not used set to
<None>. By pausing means that course and fine outputs will be de-activated,
and that dosing is temporarily halted while the signal remains. As soon as the
signal is removed, dosing continues where it left off.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
InputSignal Input Input signal to trigger a pause of
None dose sequence.
SignalState Active, In which state the signal triggers.
NotActive
Active

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 144 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.6 Abort_____
Input signal that triggers a abort of the dosing cycle, if not used set to
<None>. By aborting means that course and fine outputs will immediately be
de-activated, no result will be calculated, empty cycle will be skipped and the
dosing cycle will be aborted.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
InputSignal Input Input signal to trigger a abort of
None dose sequence.
SignalState Active, In which state the signal triggers.
NotActive
Active

8.10.2.7 PreDose_____
This group sets the amount of pre-dosing that will be put in the container
before regular dosing starts. The dose module will use the fine output to reach
the required amount. Pre-dose is most commonly used to make sure a small
barrier of dosed product exists in the bottom of the holding container, this can
minimise splashing and kinetic energy transfers from the in-flight product
during normal fine/course dosing. After PreDose state the dose module
continues to the CourseDose state where both course and fine outputs are
activated.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Value Numeric How much pre-dose that will be
put into the container before
normal course and fine dosing
starts. PreDose uses the fine-
0 dose output.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 145 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.8 ZeroCheck
This group sets conditions that regulate if the scale must be at (or close to)
zero before proceeding with dosing. Note the stability conditions are
recursive, this means that if the scale has been stable and within the allowed
limits before, and up to, function activates then the criteria’s are considered
fulfilled, zerocheck will then pass the dose module then continues directly to
Tare state.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Enabled Boolean If zero level is checked after start
condition. Note: if InputSignal is
defined, then the trigger must
also be detected before the
True zerocheck is performed.
InputSignal Input An inputsignal that triggers the
zero check. If not used than set
None to <None>.
SignalState Active, In which state the signal triggers.
NotActive
Active
TimeOut Numeric How long the zerocheck will be
active without the zerolevel being
acceptable before generating an
0 ms alarm. Zero means wait forever.
StableTime Numeric For how long the weight must be
within StabilityDivisions before
the scale is deemed stable. Only
valid if StabilityDivisions are non-
1000 ms zero.
StabilityDivisions Numeric How much the weight is allowed
to fluctuate within the StableTime
window to accept the scale as
stable. If zero then the indicator
0d stable window is used instead.
MaxDivisions Numeric Maximum allowed zero level as
divisions. If zero then the
indicator zero flag is used
0d instead (normally ±0.25 d).

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 146 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.9 Tare_____
This group sets conditions that regulate if the scale should be tared before
proceeding with dosing. By tared means that the weight of a container or
product from previous dosing will be automatically deducted from the dosing
that is about to start. I.e. the dosing will then use a net weight value.
Note the stability conditions are recursive, this means that if the scale has
been stable and within the allowed limits before, and up to, function activates
(after eventual delay) then the criteria’s are considered fulfilled, the tare will
be calculated the dose module then continues directly to PreDose state.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Enabled Boolean If scale is tared after start
condition. Note: if InputSignal is
defined, then the trigger must be
detected before the tare is
True calculated. Se also DelayTime.
InputSignal Input An inputsignal that triggers the
tare. If not used than set to
None <None>.
SignalState Active, In which state the signal triggers.
NotActive
Active
DelayTime Numeric The delay that is inserted after
tare activation (trigger or in
sequence). I.e. tare is not
calculated until this interval has
0 ms passed.
StableTime Numeric For how long the weight must be
within StabilityDivisions before
the scale is deemed stable Only
valid if StabilityDivisions are non-
3000 ms zero.
StableTimeOut Numeric For how long this stage waits for
stability before generating an
0 ms alarm. Zero means wait forever.
StabilityDivisions Numeric How much the weight is allowed
to fluctuate within the StableTime
window to accept the scale as
stable. If zero then the indicator
0d stable window is used instead.
UseIndicatorTare Boolean If false then dosing will use
internal tare value and not
False change indicator indication.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 147 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.10 CourseDose
This group sets the conditions and output signal for the course dose portion of
the dose sequence. During course dose both FineDose and CourseDose
outputs will be activated. The exact amount of product that will be dosed
during CourseDose is only indirectly set by the FineDose value; therefore
course dose does not itself have a set value. In practice course dose will be
active from start normal dosing (after PreDose) and until (TargetValue -
FineDoseValue) is reached. To change the amount of product dosed during
CourseDose state, change the pre-dose or fine-dose values.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
DelayTime Numeric The delay that is inserted before
course dose starts. Mostly used
to bridge the kinetic energy from
0 ms the PreDose.
Output->Signal Output Which output that will be set to
true when course dosing is
None active.
Output->ActiveState Active, If output is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when;
Active Output state is true.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 148 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.11 FineDose_
This group sets the conditions, amount and output signal for the fine dose
portion of the dose sequence. During fine dose only the FineDose output will
be activated. This stage has an OverSwing interval, during this time the fine
dose output will be active without comparisons between target and current
weight. I.e. the fine dose will be running ‘blind’. The OverSwing interval is to
bridge the kinetic energy introduced on the scale from product in free-fall
from the previous course dose stage, unless compensated this energy can
cause the scale to temporarily overshoot the target value and stop the dosing
sequence prematurely. After FineDose the dosing module normally continues
with the Target state, however for installations where the weight always
should be at or above target (i.e. not below) an optional PostDose stage can
be activated.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Value Numeric The trip point before TargetValue
when course dose is stopped
0 kg and only fine dose will continue.
OverswingTime Numeric The interval after course dose
when fine dose runs ‘blind’.
During this time the weight is
0 ms allowed to be above TargetValue.
Output->Signal Output Which output that will be set to
None true when fine dosing is active.
Output->ActiveState Active, If output is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when;
Active Output state is true.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 149 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.12 PostDose_____
This group sets the parameter for the optional postdose stage. By postdose
means that, after finedose is finished and inflight delay has expired, then the
current weight is checked against target, if the weight is still below target then
the postdose is activated. Postdose will in this case activate the FineDose
output for a set amount of time before the module continues with weight and
in-flight calculations.
This feature is normally only used in installations where weight should
always be at or above target, never below.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Time Numeric For how long the FineDose
output will be activated if the
0 ms weight is found to be less than
target after inflight delay.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 150 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.13 Target_____
This group sets the conditions for the in-flight and target weight calculation
portion of the dose sequence. In-flight refers to the amount of product that
enters the container even after dosing has been signalled to stop. The effect is
influenced by external factors such as pressure variation, product viscosity,
valves, pipes, etc. and these factors will affect the accuracy of the achieved
target weight.
In practice, to be able to reach the target value with highest accuracy, the in-
flight value controls the trip point before target value where the fine dosing
must stop. The in-flight value can be manually entered and remain fixed, until
changed by operator or alternatively be allowed to be automatically adjusted
after each dosing cycle.
Pulsating or inconsistent product flow will never be fully compensated by the
in-flight mechanics. The key to consistent and accurate weighing results
always relies on that external systems are linear and repeatable.
Note the stability conditions for weight calculation are recursive, this means
that if the scale has been stable and within the allowed limits before, and up
to, in-flight interval expires, then the criteria’s are considered fulfilled, the
weight and in-flight adjustment will be calculated the dose module then
continues to the Ready state

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
InflightTime Numeric The minimum amount of time
after fine dosing has been given
signal to stop and before weight
calculation and in-flight
0 ms adjustment is done.
InflightPercent Numeric The percentage of the error
between desired and measured
target weight that will be
automatically added/removed
from current in-flight value. If
zero then no automatic
correction is performed. Be
aware of potential self-
resonance if a large percentage
0% is used.
InflightValue Numeric The current trip point value
below target weight where fine
dosing is given signal top stop. If
InflightPercent is nonzero then
this value will be automatically
adjusted, by the allotted amount,
0 kg after each dose cycle.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 151 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
InflightSaveThreshold Numeric When InflightPercent is non zero,
the InflightValue will be
automatically adjusted after each
dosing cycle. This value control
how much the current
InflightValue can differ from the
InflightValue saved in the non-
volatile memory before the value
is re-saved. Note: Do not use to
small interval as excessive
writing to the non-volatile
memory will wear out the memory
2d cells.
InFlightLimitDivisions Numeric The maximum number of
divisions allowed for inflight
50 d correction.
StabilityDivisions Numeric How much the weight is allowed
to fluctuate within the StableTime
window to accept the scale as
stable. If zero then the indicator
0d stable window is used instead.
StableTime Numeric For how long the weight must be
within StabilityDivisions before
the scale is deemed stable. Only
valid if StabilityDivisions are non-
3000 ms zero.
StableTimeout Numeric How long the weight calculation
will wait for stable before
generating an alarm. Zero means
0 ms wait forever.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 152 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.14 WaitCalcWeight
This group contains the parameters for an input optionally delaying the
weight calculation after dosing is finished.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
InputSignal Input The input signal that delays
calculation of dosing result. If not
None used than set to <None>.
SignalState Active, In which state the signal triggers.
NotActive
Active

8.10.2.15 Ready_____
This group sets the interval and optional output that will be activated after a
dosing sequence is finished, i.e. after calculation of weight result and inflight
correction. After the ready interval has expired the dosing sequence continues
with the Empty state.
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
Time Numeric The minimum amount of time
after calculation of weight result
and in-flight adjustment are done
before the dosing module
proceeds to the next state. If an
output is defined, this will be
active for the full duration of this
1000 ms interval.
Output->Signal Output Which output that will be set to
true when ready is active.
None
Output->ActiveState Active, If output is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when;
Active Output state is true.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 153 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.16 Empty_____
This group sets the interval and optional output that will be activated after the
Ready state has expired. It can be used to automatically trigger a discharge
cycle of the holding container. After the weight is below trip point and Empty
interval has expired the dosing module resets to the Start state.
Note: Empty stage is not applicable to DoseOut applications where dosing is
done by loss in weight.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
MaxDivisions Numeric The Empty output will be
activated until the weight in the
container is less than this weight.
0d Optionally an extra delay can be
used, see DelayPostTime.
DelayPostTime Numeric How long time after MaxDivisions
has been reached that the Empty
output is still activated.
0 ms
CheckDelayTime Numeric The hold off time before checking
0 ms against MaxDivisions.
Output->Signal Output Which output that will be set to
true when empty is active.
None
Output->ActiveState Active, If output is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when;
Active Output state is true.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 154 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.17 Error_____
This group sets the optional output that will be activated whenever an error is
detected during the dosing cycle. When an error is detected the dosing is
stopped and the dosing module enters Error state. When entering Error state
all dosing related outputs are deactivated. Dosing does not automatically re-
start when the error condition clears, instead the operator has to manually re-
start a new dosing cycle after making sure that the cause has been eliminated.
Potential causes for Errors are:
 Loss of weighing signal or weighing data out of bounds.
 The dosing module is stopped (by external command).
 If alarms are treated as errors, see next section.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Output->Signal Output Which output that will be set to
true when error is active.
None
Output->ActiveState Active, If output is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when;
Active Output state is true.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 155 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.18 Alarm_____
This group sets the optional output that will be activated whenever an alarm is
triggered during the dosing cycle. When Alarm state is entered dosing is most
often paused as the module waits for a condition that is not meet. Normally
dosing will automatically continue when the alarm condition is cleared.
However, thru setting a parameter, it is instead possible to treat Alarm
conditions as errors in which case the dosing is stopped, see previous section.
Potential causes for alarms are:
 No or to low flow into the container during dosing, if the NoFlow
check is activated. Meaning that dosed product does not enter/leave
the container in the expected flow rate.
 ZeroCheck state fails, meaning that the amount in the container
exceeds specified amount or that the weight is not within the desired
stable window (i.e. weight is unstable) for the zero to be examined.
 Tare state fails, meaning that the weight is not within the desired
stable window (i.e. weight is unstable) for the tare to be acquired.
 Target state fails, meaning that the weight is not within the desired
stable window (i.e. weight is unstable) for the dosing result to be
acquired.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
UseAsError Boolean If alarms are treated as errors in
which case also the Error state is
triggered when a cause for alarm
False is detected.
Output->Signal Output Which output that will be set to
true when alarm is active.
None
Output->ActiveState Active, If output is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when;
Active Output state is true.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 156 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.10.2.19 NoFlow_____
This group sets the minimum amount of product that must enter/leave the
container during a specific interval, i.e. flow rate. When activated, flow rate is
checked during normal course- and fine-dose sequence. If the flow is not
sufficient an alarm is triggered, and the dosing is temporarily paused.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Timeout Numeric During which interval the flow is
checked. Set to zero <0> to
0s disable flow check.
Divisions Numeric How many scale divisions the
weight must change, as minimum,
during Timeout interval unless
5d generating the no flow alarm.

8.10.2.20 IsDosing
This group sets an output connected to the state where the dose module is
actively dosing, i.e. course- or fine- dose, wait target or calculating target.
Emptying does not affect the IsDosing output.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Output->Signal Output Which output that will be set to
true when Dosing is active.
None
Output->ActiveState Active, If output is active (high) or not
NotActive active(low) when;
Active Output state is true.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 157 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.11 IdPrompt
IdPrompt is a configurable sequence handler for operator input and printing.
The operator controlled sequence will use fixed-, input-, weight-data and send
these to the PrintLog printer at command. See section 8.4.1.4 for more
information.
This group activates the IdPrompt, restart the instrument to enable
configuration.
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
NumOfIdPrompts Numeric How many IdPrompts that should
be active (only one is allowed).
Require restart of instrument to
0 take affect!.

8.11.1 IdPrompt1
This group sets number of steps in the IdPrompt, then in each step the length
and type of data for input must be configured separately.

Parameter Data Values Comment


type
Default
Label String A logical name for this IdPrompt
‘IdPrompt1’ sequence.
Enabled Boolean If this IdPrompt is enabled.
False
NumOfSteps Numeric How many step there should be
in this IdPrompt sequence
including fixed data and print
steps.
Require restart of instrument to
0 take affect!.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 158 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

8.11.1.1 Step1-StepX
Each step in the IdPrompt sequence must be configured to match the operator
workflow by first setting the StepType and PromptText for all steps.
Initially each step will only have the following parameters:
Parameter Data Values Comment
type
Default
StepType Option What type of action this step in
the sequence will represent. See
None table below for available options
PromptText String The text presented to the
<Insert> operator for this step.

Then exit and re-start the settings editor to populate each step with settings
associated with the StepType. I.e. the parameters for each step depends on the
setting of StepType.
Each step can be setup to require operator confirmation before proceeding to
next step or alternatively be silent (automatic increment).
Table with available StepTypes:

StepType Comment

None No action
Text Used for fixed (operator cannot change) or operator
input text/data field, can also be setup for minimum
length.
Weight The currently displayed weight will be added to the
sequence.
PrintLog Print (send) the sequence data to the PrintLog printer
DateTime Add current date and/or time to the sequence

For more information about available options contact Flintab.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 159 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

- This page is intentionally left blank -

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 160 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

9 Instrument digital I/O


The instrument comes equipped, as standard, with four opto-isolated NPN
outputs that can be used to drive external low voltage relays directly.
Additionally the instrument has three opto-isolated input signals, can be
potential free, for connecting external equipment.
Internally the instrument has connectors for keyboard or push-buttons; these
are used for providing start/stop and other common weighing related
functions.
As option extended I/O boards or legacy I/O board can be equipped which
provides up to 8 inputs and 8 relay outputs per board.
The instrument also has memory markers, which are virtual switches, and
indicator flags that signal indicator states such as stability, zero etc.
Operating on all digital I/O signals are PLC ladder blocks and various utility
logic gates which can bind the signals to create safety interlocks or other
function specific outputs.
See image below for an overview of the instrument digital I/O:
47-20 Instrument

Internal I/O External I/O

Memory Markers Standard I/O


32 – Memory only, Marker_0..31 4 – NPN outputs, Output_0..3
3 – Opto-isolated inputs, Input_1..3
Standard Keys
5 – Internal keys, DKeys_2..6

Options, One of:


Standard I/O
1 – Opto-isolated input, Input_0
Extended I/O
8 – Relay outputs, EX_OUT_A_1..8
Indicator Status Flags 8 – Opto-isolated inputs, EX_IN_A_1..8
8/ind – Memory only, IndFlags

Weighing applications Or

Legacy I/O
3 – Relay outputs, Output_4..6
PLC, Dosing, batching, setpoints etc. 4 – Opto-isolated inputs, Input_4..7

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 161 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

9.1 Memory markers


Memory markers are virtual switches that can be used as both input and
output sources for the instrument weighing modules. Each ‘switch’ can be in
either true (active, high) or false (non active, low) state.
Although they control no physical signals, they are very useful when more
complex logic signal gating is required or when an output does need to
control external equipment directly.
I/O Name I/O Type External Comment

Marker_0 Virtual memory No Can be used as both inputs and


to switches outputs
Marker_31

See section 9.6 Digital I/O examples for examples of using a combination of
PLC gates, memory markers and set-points to create flexible weighing
applications.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 162 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

9.2 Indicator status flags


Indicator status flags are only accessible through the IndicatorLadder object,
see section 8.8.4 IndicatorLadder, PLC ladder with indicator states. The
IndicatorLadder is used when weighing related status such as stability, zero
etc. needs to be accessible as a digital I/O for other PLC blocks.
When activated, the following status flags are available for each internal
indicator;
I/O Name I/O Type External Comment
Connector:pin
None Virtual flag No Empty flag, no status

IsStable Virtual Flag No Is true when the selected


Indicator is in stable equilibrium.
IsTared Virtual Flag No Is true when the selected
Indicator has an active tare, i.e.
in Net weighing mode.
IsPresetTared Virtual Flag No Is true when the selected
Indicator has an active tare, i.e.
in Net weighing mode AND that
the tare was introduced as a
preset tare.
IsPositive Virtual Flag No Is true when the selected
Indicator is at zero or above
zero. I.e. above -0.5d.
IsZero Virtual Flag No Is true when the selected
Indicator is at zero (display = 0).
I.e. within ±0.5d from current
zero.
IsAbsZero Virtual Flag No Is true when the selected
Indicator is at absolute zero. I.e.
within ±0.25d from current zero.
IsOutOfRange Virtual Flag No Is true when the selected
Indicator is outside allowed
weighing range. For example
gross weight is more than 9.5d
over maximum capacity or loss
of weighing signal.
IsPowerOn Virtual Flag No Is true when the selected
Indicator is in PowerOn
sequence. I.e. waiting to set
poweron zero or have not
finished start sequence. No
weighing functions and/or
communication are allowed.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 163 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

9.3 Standard I/O signals


In addition to memory markers, standard instruments without any optional
expansion boards have the flowing digital I/O’s available:

I/O Name I/O Type External Comment


Connector:pin
Output_0 Output, NPN Yes Maximum load 0.5A combined
Back panel I/O DB-9:1 and individually.
Output_1 Output, NPN Yes Maximum load 0.5A combined
Back panel I/O DB-9:6 and individually.
Output_2 Output, NPN Yes Maximum load 0.5A combined
Back panel I/O DB-9:2 and individually.
Output_3 Output, NPN Yes Maximum load 0.5A combined
Back panel I/O DB-9:7 and individually.
Input_0 Input, Opto-isolated No Internal opto isolated input,
Internal header JP601:1 normally not used.
Input_1 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Recommended for flow or pulse
Back panel I/O DB-9:4 virtual indicators.
Input_2 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Recommended for flow or pulse
Back panel I/O DB-9:9 virtual indicators.
Input_3 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Recommended for flow or pulse
Back panel I/O DB-9:5 virtual indicators.
DKeys_2 Input, digital No Only for internal use. No
Internal header J701:8 0V=True standard function.
DKeys_3 Input, digital No Only for internal use. No
Internal header J701:7 0V=True standard function.
DKeys_4 Input, digital No Only for internal use. No
Internal header J701:6 0V=True standard function.
DKeys_5 Input, digital No Only for internal use. Standard
Internal header J701:5 0V=True function <Start>.
DKeys_6 Input, digital No Only for internal use. Standard
Internal header J701:4 0V=True function <Stop>.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 164 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

9.4 Extended I/O signals


By fitting the instrument with the optional extended I/O board 4-54984, an
additional eight relay outputs and eight opto-isolated inputs will be available:

I/O Name I/O Type External Comment


Connector:pin
EX_OUT_A_1 Output, Relay Yes Max 6A at 24CDC
Back panel
J1T:1-NC J1T:2-NO
J1T:3-CM (shared)
EX_OUT_A_2 Output, Relay Yes Max 6A at 24CDC
Back panel
J1T:4-NC J1T:5-NO
J1T:3-CM (shared)
EX_OUT_A_3 Output, Relay Yes Max 6A at 24CDC
Back panel
J1T:6-NC J1T:7-NO
J1T:8-CM (shared)
EX_OUT_A_4 Output, Relay Yes Max 6A at 24CDC
Back panel
J1T:9-NC J1T:10-NO
J1T:8-CM (shared)
EX_OUT_A_5 Output, Relay Yes Max 6A at 24CDC
Back panel
J1B:1-NC J1B:2-NO
J1B:3-CM (shared)
EX_OUT_A_6 Output, Relay Yes Max 6A at 24CDC
Back panel
J1B:4-NC J1B:5-NO
J1B:3-CM (shared)
EX_OUT_A_7 Output, Relay Yes Max 6A at 24CDC
Back panel
J1B:6-NC J1B:7-NO
J1B:8-CM (shared)
EX_OUT_A_8 Output, Relay Yes Max 6A at 24CDC
Back panel
J1B:9-NC J1B:10-NO
J1B:8-CM (shared)

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 165 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

EX_IN_A_1 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Opto isolated input, 1-4 uses


Back panel shared common signal.
J0T:1- +V J0T:5-CM Max: 36VDC
EX_IN_A_2 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Opto isolated input, 1-4 uses
Back panel shared common signal.
J0T:2- +V J0T:5-CM Max: 36VDC
EX_IN_A_3 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Opto isolated input, 1-4 uses
Back panel shared common signal.
J0T:3- +V J0T:5-CM Max: 36VDC
EX_IN_A_4 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Opto isolated input, 1-4 uses
Back panel shared common signal.
J0T:4- +V J0T:5-CM Max: 36VDC
EX_IN_A_5 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Opto isolated input, 5-8 uses
Back panel shared common signal.
J0B:1- +V J0B:5-CM Max: 36VDC
EX_IN_A_6 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Opto isolated input, 5-8 uses
Back panel shared common signal.
J0B:2- +V J0B:5-CM Max: 36VDC
EX_IN_A_7 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Opto isolated input, 5-8 uses
Back panel shared common signal.
J0B:3- +V J0B:5-CM Max: 36VDC
EX_IN_A_8 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Opto isolated input, 5-8 uses
Back panel shared common signal.
J0B:4- +V J0B:5-CM Max: 36VDC

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 166 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

9.5 Legacy I/O signals


By fitting the instrument with the optional legacy I/O board 4-55043, an
additional three relay outputs and four opto-isolated inputs will be available:

I/O Name I/O Type External Comment


Connector:pin
Output_4 Output, Relay Yes Max 6A at 24CDC
Back panel
Bottom DB25:4-NO
Bottom DB25:8-NC
Bottom DB25:20-CM
Top DB25:18-NO
Top DB25:21-NC
Top DB25:22-CM
DB9:9-NO
DB9:4-CM
Output_5 Output, Relay Yes Max 6A at 24CDC
Back panel
Bottom DB25:21-NO
Bottom DB25:22-NC
Bottom DB25:9-CM
Top DB25:10-NO
Top DB25:23-NC
Top DB25:11-CM
DB9:2-NO
DB9:3-CM
Output_6 Output, Relay Yes Max 6A at 24CDC
Back panel
Bottom DB25:4-NO
Bottom DB25:13-CM
Top DB25:12-NO
Top DB25:25-NC
Top DB25:24-CM
DB9:7-NO
DB9:8-CM

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 167 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Input_4 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Opto isolated input. Shared


Back panel common for inputs 4-7. Common
Bottom DB25:18-+V can be internally grounded by
Bottom DB25:16-CM JP2.
Top DB25:6-+V Max: 36VDC
Top DB25:1,14-CM
Input_5 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Opto isolated input. Shared
Back panel common for inputs 4-7. Common
Bottom DB25:6-+V can be internally grounded by
Bottom DB25:16-CM JP2.
Top DB25:19-+V Max: 36VDC
Top DB25:1,14-CM
DB9:5-+V (JP2=ON)
Input_6 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Opto isolated input. Shared
Back panel common for inputs 4-7. Common
Bottom DB25:17-+V can be internally grounded by
Bottom DB25:16-CM JP2.
Top DB25:7-+V Max: 36VDC
Top DB25:1,14-CM
Input_7 Input, Opto-isolated Yes Opto isolated input. Shared
Back panel common for inputs 4-7. Common
Bottom DB25:23-+V can be internally grounded by
Bottom DB25:16-CM JP2.
Top DB25:9-+V Max: 36VDC
Top DB25:1,14-CM

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 168 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

9.6 Digital I/O examples


The following sections details examples of combining the digital I/O of the
instrument with PLC building blocks and setpoint modules to create advanced
weighing applications.
References of the PLC building blocks see section: 8.8 PLC______
References of the setpoint modules see section: 8.6 SetPoints.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 169 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

9.6.1 Example, non-automatic checkweigher


Detailed description:
The operator wants to have three external lights, indicating;
- above tolerance, user provided setpoint
- within tolerance
- below tolerance, user provided setpoint
Further, when the weight has been stable and within tolerance for duration of
3 seconds, a single pulse (1s) should be generated, driving an external buzzer,
indicating to the operator that the weighing has succeeded.

Above tolerance
LimitHigh
Weight OK and stable 3s Within tolerance, weight OK
LimitLow
Below tolerance

To create the necessary functionality the following indicator modules are


needed:
 Two Setpoint modules, setting the minimum and maximum values for
the accepted tolerance. Note: Setpoint1 must be less than Setpoint2.
 One PLC->IndicatorLadder module for connecting the stable and
InRange flags of the indicator to a digital I/O (memory marker).
 Four PLC->Ladder modules for gating of the three lamps and to gate
Stable signal with WithinTolerance lamp.
 Two PLC->SRFlipFlops for the delay and duration of the buzzer
output.
Note: Assuming standard stability settings for the indicator (1s).
Add all of the modules above through the settings editor and restart the
instrument before continuing.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 170 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

List of external digital I/O’s:


I/O Name I/O Type Comment

Output_0 Output, NPN Driving a low voltage LED lamp directly.


Signal: Weight below tolerance.
WeightToLow
Output_1 Output, NPN Driving a low voltage LED lamp directly.
Signal: Weight within tolerance.
WeightOK
Output_3 Output, NPN Driving a low voltage LED lamp directly.
Signal: Weight above tolerance.
WeightToHigh
Output_4 Output, NPN Driving a low voltage buzzer directly.
Signal: Weight Ok and stable >3s. Maximum
on-time is 1 second.

List of internal digital I/O’s:

I/O Name I/O Type Comment

Marker_0 Virtual memory For Setpoint1 output. True when weight is


switch above Setpoint1:Value.
Marker_1 Virtual memory For Setpoint2 output. True when weight is
switch above Setpoint2:Value.
Marker_2 Virtual memory Gating of indicator Stable and InRange
switch status flags. True only when indicator is both
stable and in range.
Marker_3 Virtual memory Gating of WeightOk and indicator flags
switch Stable and InRange (Marker_2)
Marker_4 Virtual memory Output for the first timer block, indicating
switch that weight is ok and has been stable for 3
seconds.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 171 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

9.6.1.1 Setpoint setup


The parameters that must be changed from default values are:
Setpoint->SP1:
Parameter Data Value Comment
type

Enabled True Enable the setpoint

Setpoint value LimitLow The minimum weight value that is


accepted.
Output signal Marker_0 Set the output to virtual memory
marker.
Marker_0 = Weight above SP1

Setpoint->SP2:

Parameter Data Value Comment


type

Enabled True Enable the setpoint

Setpoint value LimitHigh The maximum weight value that is


accepted.
Output signal Marker_1 Set the output to virtual memory
marker.
Marker_1 = Weight above SP2

Note: In a real-world application, other parameters may need to be changed.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 172 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

9.6.1.2 IndicatorLadder setup


We want to gate the indicator Stable and the InRange status flags of the
indicator to a memory marker.
Note: As the indicator only has the inverted flag, OutOfRange, we need to use
the inverse of this flag to get the function we need. Also the InRange flag is
not really necessary for this particular application but included to make the
example more complete.
The parameters that must be changed from default values are:
PLC->IndicatorLadder->1:

Parameter Data Value Comment


type

Output signal Marker_2 Set the output to virtual memory


marker.
Marker_2 = Stable AND InRange

Equivalent ladder diagram:

Stable OutOfRAnge
Marker_2

For this we need an IndicatorLadder with 2 conditions, according to table


below:
Condition Parameters Setting Comment

Condition_0 Function Begin, Start Block1


IndFlag Stable
Condition_1 Function AndInverted Block1 =
Stable AND
(NOT(OutOfRange))
IndFlag OutOfRange

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 173 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

9.6.1.3 Ladder setup


We need four ladders for this example, the first three gating the Setpoint
value (limit values) to the external output signals;
PLC->Ladder->1:
Parameter Data Value Comment
type

LabelText WeightToLow Edit the label to reflect the


function we are creating.
Output signal Output_0 True indicates ‘WeightToLow’

Function: When the weight is below both Setpoints we want this output to be
true (active).
Equivalent ladder diagram:

SP1:Marker_0 SP2:Marker_1
Output_0

For this we need a Ladder with 2 conditions, according to table below:


Condition Parameters Setting Comment

Condition_0 Function BeginInverted Start Block1


Signal Marker_0
Condition_1 Function AndInverted Block1 =
(NOT(SP1)) AND (NOT(SP2))
Signal Marker_1

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 174 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

PLC->Ladder->2:
Parameter Data Value Comment
type

LabelText WeightOk Edit the label to reflect the


function we are creating.
Output signal Output_1 True indicates ‘WeightOk’

Function: When the weight is between Setpoints we want this output to be


true (active).
Condition: Setpoint1 < Sepoint2.
Equivalent ladder diagram:

SP1:Marker_0 SP2:Marker_1
Output_1

For this we need a Ladder with 2 conditions, according to table below:

Condition Parameters Setting Comment

Condition_0 Function Begin Start Block1


Signal Marker_0
Condition_1 Function AndInverted Block1 =
SP1 AND (NOT(SP2))
Signal Marker_1

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 175 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

PLC->Ladder->3:
Parameter Data Value Comment
type

LabelText WeightToHigh Edit the label to reflect the


function we are creating.
Output signal Output_2 True indicates ‘WeightToHigh’

Function: When the weight above both Setpoints we want this output to be
true (active).
Equivalent ladder diagram:

SP1:Marker_0 SP2:Marker_1
Output_2

For this we need a Ladder with 2 conditions, according to table below:


Condition Parameters Setting Comment

Condition_0 Function Begin Start Block1


Signal Marker_0
Condition_1 Function And Block1 =
(SP1) AND (SP2)
Signal Marker_1

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 176 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

The final ladder is needed to gate the internal IndicatorLadder output (Stable
and InRange) with the WeightOk output.
PLC->Ladder->4:

Parameter Data Value Comment


type

LabelText WeightStableOk Edit the label to reflect the


function we are creating.
Output signal Marker_3 True indicate WeightOk AND
Stable AND InRange

Function: When the weight is between Setpoints and Stable and InRange the
output shall be true (active). We already have the signal for weight between
setpoints (WeihtOk) and indicator flags:
WeightOk AND (Stable AND InRange) = Output_1 AND Marker_2
Condition: Setpoint1 < Sepoint2.
Equivalent ladder diagram:

Output_1 Marker_2
Marker_3

For this we need a Ladder with 2 conditions, according to table below:

Condition Parameters Setting Comment

Condition_0 Function Begin Start Block1


Signal Output_1
Condition_1 Function And Block1 =
Output_1 AND Marker_2
Signal Marker_2

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 177 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

9.6.1.4 SRFlipFlop setup


We need two timed SRFlipFlops. The first one to create the 3 second delay
while checking that the weight is Ok and stable, and the second one to
generate the one second pulse to the buzzer.
Create the 3 second delay, while checking WeightOk and Stable and InRange,
if the weight goes unstable or outside range, reset the timer.
PLC->SRFlipFlop->1:

SRFlipFlopGate Parameters Setting Comment

Output Signal Marker_4 The output we want to control

Set Signal Marker_3 Input true = WeightOk AND


Stable AND InRAnge.
Edge Rising We want to trig on positive,
rising edge.
Delay 3000 ms We want to start the pulse
3000ms after set event
triggers.
Reset Signal Marker_3 As soon as weight is not ok or
not stable we want to reset the
SRFlipFlop.
Edge Falling Trig reset event on negative,
falling edge.
Delay 0 ms We want to trig reset event
without delay.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 178 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

The seond SRFlipFlop will only generate a one second pulse for the buzzer
when the output from the first SRFlipFlop has triggered.
PLC->SRFlipFlop->2:

SRFlipFlopGate Parameters Setting Comment

Output Signal Output_3 Output for driving the buzzer.

Set Signal Marker_4 The output from the first


SRFlipFlop.
Edge Rising We want to trig on positive,
rising edge.
Delay 0 ms We want to start the pulse as
soon as the set event triggers.
Reset Signal Marker_4 We want to have the reset
event triggered at the same
time set event occurs and by
the same input.
Edge Rising Trig reset event on positive,
rising edge.
Delay 1000 ms Delay the SRFlipFlop output
reset to low, by 1000 ms.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 179 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

- This page is intentionally left blank -

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 180 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

10 Connections
The connectors for loadcells (scale), communication interfaces, I/O and
power are located on the back panel of the instrument. See images below:
Standard 47-20-01 without optional boards:

LOADCELLS SCALE GND COM3

12VDC
USB-A

USB-B
Fieldbus (COM2)
ETH0
I/O COM1
CAL

Note: 47-20-02/03 cannot be fitted with Extended I/O board 4-54984 or


Legacy I/O board 4-55043.
The pin-out for each connector is detailed in the following sections.
If your instrument is fitted with optional boards, see section 10.10 Extended
I/O board 4-54984 or section 10.11 Legacy I/O board 4-55043.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 181 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

10.1 Loadcells
The indicator has a single supply, single sense, four channel load cell
interface. This means that each channel (load cell input) has a dedicated input
stage and can be individually digitized, but the excitation (power supply) and
sense is shared between all channels.
Next to the load cell connector is a terminal for scale ground connection, it is
vital for the functionality and signal integrity of the indicator that a low ohm
connection between the scale platform and the indicator is made through this
terminal. Ideally this should also be connected to mains ground (earth) for
minimizing sources of measurement errors such as mains 50/60 Hz induced
EM fields. For the load cell signals, always use a shielded cable, with shield
connected to housing/platform in both ends.
The excitation is 10V regulated DC voltage biased around +2.5V, i.e. polarity
is +7.5V and -2.5V. Therefore make sure that no connections or signal paths
to ground or housing are made to the load cell power supply.
The connection to the load cell interface is made by a 15-pin d-sub male
connector (female/socket on indicator). Pin-out according to table below:
Socket number Signal Abbreviation
8 Load cell 1, signal + SIG_1+
7 Load cell 1, signal - SIG_1-
15 Load cell 2, signal + SIG_2+
14 Load cell 2, signal - SIG_2-
1 Load cell 3, signal + SIG_3+
9 Load cell 3, signal - SIG_3-
2 Load cell 4, signal + SIG_4+
10 Load cell 4, signal - SIG_4-
6 Sense+ SEN+
11 Sense- SEN-
4,12 Excitation- (-2.5V) EXC-
5,13 Excitation+ (+7.5V) EXC+
Housing Shield SHD

15-pin socket connector, pin-out


seen from outside

Connector Signal Abbreviation


SCALE GND Scale platform, Mains ground SGND

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 182 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

10.2 COM1 – RS232/RS485


The serial communication port COM1 is a dual interface serial port with can
be configured by jumpers for either RS232 or RS485 (2W or 4W). The port
also has an optional power supply pin for supplying power to external
equipment (<1W), the pin is activated by a jumper and can be selected from
either 5V, 12V or left not connected. The connector is a 9-pole d-sub socket
(male/pin on cable).
Selection of the interface, RS485 termination and power supply is made by
jumpers next to the connector inside the instrument. See image below:

1-2 Pin 9 COM1 = +12V


2-3 Pin 9 COM1 = +5V

Selects RS232 for COM1


Termination A-B (7,3) (no jumper = RS485)
Selects 2W RS485 for COM1
Termination Z-Y (2,8) (no jumper=RS232 or 4W)

Pin-out according to table below:


Socket number Signal Comment
2 TX / Z RS232 TX or RS485 2/4W Z
3 RX / B RS232 RX or RS485 4W B
5 GND Communication ground
7 CTS / A RS232 CTS or RS485 4W A
8 RTS / Y RS232 RTS or RS485 2/4W Y
9 EXT_PWR +12V, +5V or no connection. Depending
on jumper. Max. 1 W

9-pin socket connector, pin-out


seen from outside

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 183 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

10.3 COM3 – RS232


The serial communication port COM3 has a RS232 interface with an optional
power supply pin for supplying power to external equipment (<1W), the pin
is activated by a jumper and can be selected from either 5V, 12V or left not
connected. The communication port is optional and may not be available on
your instrument. Consult Flintab for further information. The connector is a
9-pole d-sub socket (male/pin on cable).
Selection of the external power supply (<1W) is made by jumpers next to the
connector inside the instrument. See image below:

1-2 Pin 9 COM3 = +12V (d-sub)


2-3 Pin 9 COM3 = +5V (d-sub)

Pin-out according to table below:

Socket number Signal Comment


2 TX RS232 TX
3 RX RS232 RX
5 GND Communication ground
9 EXT_PWR +12V, +5V or no connection. Depending
on jumper. Max. 1 W

9-pin socket connector, pin-out


seen from outside

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 184 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

10.4 Opto-isolated I/O


The indicator has an opto-isolated input/output interface, with 3 inputs and 4
outputs available on a 9-pole d-sub socket connector (male/pin on cable). The
outputs are of open collector NPN type, when active the output is short-
circuited to ground. An additional input is only available internally in the
instrument through a 3-pin connector.
All four input signals share the same common signal; normally (default) the
common signal is internally grounded by a jumper, i.e. connected to GND.
This setup make it possible to use the +12VDC supply, also available on the
d-sub connector, as input source.
If however an external common signal is to be used, the jumper inside the
instrument must be removed. The common signal is then left potential free
(free floating). See image below:

Jumper for IO_Power to


12VDC JP603 (no I/O status LED:s
jumper=external power) Outputs-Left, Inputs-Right

Jumper for input common


Input_0 (Power &Gnd) grounding JP602(no jumper=open)

Pin-out according to table on next page:

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 185 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Simplified schematic Simplified schematic


Inputs Outputs
(Default, JP603)
+12VDC IO_Power
1k8 Input_0-3
Output_0-3

Input_Common Vsat max. 1.3V


3V3 (Default, JP602)

Socket number Signal Comment


1 Output_0 NPN, max. 500mA
2 Output_2 NPN, max. 500mA
3 IO_Power (+12V) Power supply I/O, max. 5W total. Normally
connected to internal 12VDC. Can be
connected to external 12/24VDC when
jumper JP603 is disconnected.
4 Input_1 high@min. 0.2 mA, V in > 5VDC
low@max. 0.04 mA, V in < 3VDC
5 Input_3 high@min. 0.2 mA, V in > 5VDC
low@max. 0.04 mA, V in < 3VDC
6 Output_1 NPN, max. 500mA
7 Output_3 NPN, max. 500mA
8 Input_Common Normally internally grounded (JP602)! Else
connect to external input ground. (GND)
9 Input_2 high@min. 0.2 mA, V in > 5VDC
low@max. 0.04 mA, V in < 3VDC

9-pin socket connector, pin-out


seen from outside

10.4.1 Example, connection of inputs


Normally the Input_Common, socket 8, is internally grounded, this means
that the +12V output can be used directly as an input source, see example
below:

47-20 I/O connector External relay, push button or similar

INPUT_1 4

+12V 3

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 186 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

10.4.2 Example, connection of outputs


The outputs are of open collector NPN (sinking) type and can be used to
energize a 12V relay coil directly, provided that coil resistance is higher than
50 ohms. See example below:

47-20 I/O connector External relay, 12VDC coil

OUTPUT_0 1 -

+12V 3 +

10.5 Fieldbus (COM2)


The indicator has an optional fieldbus interface using interchangeable plug-in
modules allowing for instant connectivity to all leading industrial networks.
Currently the following fieldbus modules are available: CANopen, CC-Link,
Controlnet, DeviceNet, Modbus-RTU, Profibus, EtherCat, EtherNet I/P,
Modbus-TCP, Profinet-IO and Profinet-IO 2 port.
Optionally so-called passive modules can also be fitted, which provide
Bluetooth, RS232, RS485 or USB connectivity through the standard serial
port interface (COM2).
When a fieldbus module is fitted the 4 status LED’s next to the connector will
convey fieldbus link status to the operator.
Due to the large scoop of options, the fieldbus and passive interfaces is
detailed in a separate document. Contact Flintab for further information.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 187 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

10.6 Ethernet 10/100Mb


The indicator is equipped with a standard RJ45 Ethernet I/P interface with
auto sensing 10 or 100Mb link speed. The connector has 2 status LED’s, one
green (left) indicating Ethernet activity, and one yellow (right) indicating
100Mb link. Pin-out (and standard cable colours) of the RJ45 jack according
to table below:
Pin number Signal Comment
1 (left) TD+ Transmit +, white-green
2 TD- Transmit -, green
3 RD+ Receive +, white-orange
4 (to pin 5) 75 Ohm to GND, blue
5 (to pin 4) white-blue
6 RD- Receive -, orange
7 (to pin 8) 75 Ohm to GND, white-brown
8 (right) (to pin 7) brown

10.7 USB-A (Host)


The indicator has a native USB-A (host) interface, capable to connect with
standard USB client devices (USB-hubs, mass storage, HID and serial
interface converters). When used with mass storage (USB-memory sticks) the
USB device has the root path ‘\USB HD\’. Pin-out of the USB-A plug (and
standard cable colours) according to table below:

Pin number Signal Comment


1 (bottom) VCC +5VDC, red
2 D- Data -, white
3 D+ Data +, green
4 (top) GND Ground, black

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 188 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

10.8 USB-B (Client)


The indicator has a standard USB-B (client) interface, capable to connect
with USB-A (Host) devices. Pin-out of the USB-B plug (and standard cable
colours) according to table below:

Pin number Signal Comment


1 (top left) VCC +5VDC, red
2 D- Data -, white
3 D+ Data +, green
4 (bottom right) GND Ground, black

10.9 12VDC power supply


The indicator is designed to be used with a 12VDC±10% 1.5A (min. 18W)
stabilized power source. The connector is an EIAJ RC-5320 Class IV socket,
with centre pin positive. Normally a suitable adapter with correct plug will be
included with your instrument.
If the input voltage is outside tolerated levels (approximately ±10%) weight
display goes into error mode (overload) and no weighing functions are
allowed.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 189 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

10.10 Extended I/O board 4-54984


The extended I/O board 4-54984 provides eight relay outputs and eight opto-
isolated potential free inputs.

Simplified schematic Simplified schematic


Inputs Outputs

EX_OUT_A_x_NO
4k7 EX_IN_A_x
EX_OUT_A_x_NC

EX_IN_A_x_COMMON
EX_OUT_A_x_COMMON
3V3

Specification inputs:
high@min. 0.2mA, V in > 5VDC, V max < 36VDC
low@max. 0.04mA, V in < 3VDC

Specification outputs:
min. switching voltage 12VDC/AC
min. switching current 10mA
max. 6A@12DC
max. 0.8A@48VDC.
typical response time 5ms

See pin-out and connector designation on next page.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 190 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Extended I/O board 4-54984:

J0T J1T

1 7 1 10
Inputs Outputs
1 7 1 10

J0B J1B

Inputs Outputs
Connector Pin Function Connector Pin Function
number number
J0T 1 EX_IN_A _1 J1T 1 EX_OUT_A_1_NC
J0T 2 EX_IN_A _2 J1T 2 EX_OUT_A _1_NO
J0T 3 EX_IN_A _3 J1T 3 EX_OUT_A _1_2_COMMON
J0T 4 EX_IN_A _4 J1T 4 EX_OUT_A _2_NC
J0T 5 EX_IN_A _1_4_COMMON J1T 5 EX_OUT_A _2_NO
J0T 6 GND J1T 6 EX_OUT_A _3_NC
J0T 7 12V_FUSED J1T 7 EX_OUT_A _3_NO
J0B 1 EX_IN_A _5 J1T 8 EX_OUT_A _3_4_COMMON
J0B 2 EX_IN_A _6 J1T 9 EX_OUT_A _4_NC
J0B 3 EX_IN_A _7 J1T 10 EX_OUT_A _4_NO
J0B 4 EX_IN_A _8 J1B 1 EX_OUT_A _5_NC
J0B 5 EX_IN_A _5_8_COMMON J1B 2 EX_OUT_A _5_NO
J0B 6 GND J1B 3 EX_OUT_A _5_6_COMMON
J0B 7 12V_FUSED J1B 4 EX_OUT_A _6_NC
J1B 5 EX_OUT_A _6_NO
J1B 6 EX_OUT_A _7_NC
J1B 7 EX_OUT_A _7_NO
J1B 8 EX_OUT_A _7_8_COMMON
J1B 9 EX_OUT_A _8_NC
J1B 10 EX_OUT_A _8_NO

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 191 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

10.11 Legacy I/O board 4-55043


The legacy I/O board 4-55043 provides three separate interfaces with
functional equivalent to the Flintab instrument 47-04/3431F-C/D.
 A 25 socket d-sub connector emulating the serial interface
47-04:COM1. Has both RS232 and 20mA passive current loop
interfaces. These are connected to the 47-20 interface COM3.
 A 9 socket d-sub connector emulating the I/O interface 4-54041,
(modified keyboard connector). Normally used for external set-zero
input and scale ok output.
 A 25 socket d-sub connector emulating the photocell interface
PC1448.
However due to the increased flexibility and capabilities of the 47-20
instrument, many pins that were previously unused or had ambiguous
functions are now replaced with new functionality. Please consult the
following sections of which pins that have retained its specification and
function.
The legacy I/O board 4-55043 provides three relay outputs and four opto-
isolated inputs in addition to the 20mA current loop interface.

Simplified schematic Simplified schematic


Inputs Outputs

Output_4-6_NO
4k7 Input_4-7
Output_4-6_NC

Input_4-7_CM
JP2 (Default) Output_4-6_CM
3V3

Specification inputs:
high@min. 0.2mA, V in > 5VDC, V max < 36VDC
low@max. 0.04mA, V in < 3VDC

Specification outputs:
min. switching voltage 12VDC/AC
min. switching current 10mA
max. 6A@12DC
max. 0.8A@48VDC.
typical response time 5ms

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 192 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

For location of the interfaces see image below:

47-04:Photocell I/F

47-04:I/O Interface
47-04:COM1 (COM3)

The 4-55043 board (rev-1 or later) has three jumpers that needs to be setup
before use.
JP1 JP2 Jumpers
JP3 Designation Comment
JP1 Connects 47-04:COM1 pin 12 (RX I-) to
internal ground.
Default:Not Installed
JP2 Connects input common to internal ground.
Required for legacy operation.
Default:Installed
JP3 Connects current loop receiver to internal
COM3:RX. I.e. selects interface to CL. Must be
removed if RS232 is to be used.
Default:Installed (Use current loop)

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 193 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

10.11.1 47-04:COM1 Interface


The bottom 25-socket d-sub (female) connector emulates the serial interfaces
of the 47-04:COM1 port fitted with the PC1391 board. I.e. the RS232
interface cannot be externally powered. Unconnected pins are not included.

Pin number Signal Comment 47-04


functional
equivalent
1 GND Internal ground Yes
2 RS232:TX Transmit data, always active Yes
Internal port: COM3
3 RS232:RX Receive data, only functional when Yes
JP3 is not installed.
Internal port: COM3
4 Output_4:NO Relay output -
6 Input_5:+V Opto-isolated input -
7 GND Internal ground Yes
8 Output_4:NC Relay output -
9 Output_5:CM Relay output, common -
10 TD+ Transmit data current loop. Yes
Current input. Internal port: COM3
11 TD- Transmit data current loop. Yes
Current output. Internal port: COM3
12 RD- Receive data current loop. (JP3) Yes
Current output. Internal port: COM3
13 Output_6:CM Relay output, common -
16 Input_4-7:CM Common for Input_4-Input_7. Yes
(GND) Is normally connected to internal
ground (JP2).
17 Input_6:+V Opto-isolated input Yes
18 Input_4:+V Opto-isolated input -
19 +12VDC Voltage output. Max. 1W -
20 Output_4:CM Relay output, common -
21 Output_5:NO Relay output -
22 Output_5:NC Relay output -
23 Input_7:+V Opto-isolated input -
24 RD+ Receive data current loop. (JP3) -
Current input. Internal port: COM3
25 Output_6:NO Relay output -

25-pin socket connector, pin-out


seen from outside

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 194 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

10.11.2 47-04:Photocell interface


The top 25-socket d-sub (female) connector emulates the photocell interface
PC1448. Unconnected pins are not included.

Pin number Signal Comment PC1448


functional
equivalent
1 Input_4-7:CM Common for Input_4-Input_7. -
(GND) Is normally connected to internal
ground (JP2).
4 +12VDC Voltage output. Max. 1W (Brown) Yes
5 GND Internal ground (Blue) Yes
6 Input_4:+V Opto-isolated input (Black) Yes
7 Input_6:+V Opto-isolated input -
8 GND Internal ground (Blue) Yes
9 Input_7:+V Opto-isolated input (Black) Yes
10 Output_5:NO Relay output -
11 Output_5:CM Relay output, common -
12 Output_6:NO Relay output -
14 Input_4-7:CM Common for Input_4-Input_7. -
(GND) Is normally connected to internal
ground (JP2).
15 +12VDC Voltage output. Max. 1W (Brown) Yes
18 Output_4:NO Relay output -
19 Input_5:+V Opto-isolated input -
20 GND Internal ground Yes
21 Output_4:NC Relay output -
22 Output_4:CM Relay output, common -
23 Output_5:NC Relay output -
24 Output_6:CM Relay output, common -
25 Output_6:NC Relay output -

25-pin socket connector, pin-out


seen from outside

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 195 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

10.11.3 47-04:I/O interface


The bottom right 9-socket d-sub (female) connector emulates the I/O
interface 4-54041. Unconnected pins are not included.

Pin number Signal Comment 4-54041


functional
equivalent
1 GND Internal ground -
2 Output_5:NO Relay output -
3 Output_5:CM Relay output, common -
4 Output_4:CM Relay output, common -
5 Input_5:+V Opto-isolated input Yes
6 +12VDC Voltage output. Max. 1W Yes
7 Output_6:NO Relay output Yes
8 Output_6:CM Relay output, common Yes
9 Output_4:NO Relay output -

9-pin socket connector, pin-out


seen from outside

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 196 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

11 Error or status indications


External influences or incorrect operation of the scale can cause faults that
generate a specific indication pattern on the display. Also some weighing
states are indicated by a specific pattern of indication and/or flashing of the
display.

11.1 Non-automatic mode


 Power-on zero wait state is indicated by only the <Start> button being
enabled and the display is flashing at about 1Hz. This is a normal state
when the indicator is configured to automatically acquire the zero
level at power-on. The scale must then be stable and within the
specified limit before the zero is set. The operator can abort by
pressing the <Start> button; when aborted, the zero level is not
acquired.

1Hz

 Full calibration not performed is indicated by the weight display


rapidly flashing continuously (also disables display test) at about 3-
4Hz. The flashing will stop as soon as a full calibration is done.

4Hz

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 197 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

 Weight above maximum, AD-signal out of range or input DC power


out of range is indicated by the ‘overload’ pattern and error symbol
being lit. This can also be caused by faulty connection to the loadcells
(scale).

11.2 Automatic mode


 When the automatic mode data collection is active the weight display
temporarily shows <d> instead of weight value.

 When a automatic mode weighing sequence is ended and the weight


has been calculated, the result is displayed including unit within the
digit display area to discern from normal weight values.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 198 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

 Automatic weighing mode errors can generate a two digit error code.
The code will be display instead of the weight result. A list of
available error codes is found in the Flintab standard protocol
description. The status information log can also be viewed to read a
verbose description of the error.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 199 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

- This page is intentionally left blank -

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 200 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

12 Technical specifications
12.1 Electrical
General
Display 480x272 High visibility colour TFT with LED
backlight and resistive touch-screen.
Interfaces Standard: RS232/RS485 (2W or4W),
Ethernet, USB, opto-isolated I/O (3I, 4O).
Option: Fieldbus, RS232x2
Power supply 12VDC (1.5A,18W ) EIAJ-5320 Class IV
Load cell interface
Topology 1-4 channels simultaneous sampling
Load 60Ω-1200Ω combined load on all 4
channels
Excitation 10VDC regulated, 2.5VDC biased (-2.5V -
+7.5V). Short circuit protection,
Sense Regulative (cable 6 wire + shield)
Input range 0.0 – 1.98 mV/V per channel
AD-conversion rate 28800x4/second, 5760x4/second available
Specifications
Accuracy class OIML III
Max. number of scale 10’000 – Compliant mode single interval
intervals 3x4000 – Compliant mode, triple interval
Signal dependant in non-compliant mode
Minimum verification 1µV
scale interval, e
Number of intervals 1, 2 or 3
Internal resolution 24bits/channel
Temperature range -10C° - +40C°
Relative humidity Max. 85%, non condensing
Zero drift Typ. 5 nV/C°
Linearity Typ. 0.00013 %
Temp drift Max. 5ppm/C°
Warm-up time Typ. 5 min. (300 s)

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 201 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

12.2 Mechanical
47-20-01 (panel mount)

Front view 125

FLINTAB WEIGHT INDICATOR 47-20

240

Recommended
Side view clearance
Connectors+cables

110 (70)

Rear view LOADCELLS


SCALE
GND COM3

Recommended 100
panel cut-out:
USB-A

USB-B

12VDC

Fieldbus (COM2)
ETH0

222x102 mm
I/O COM1

CAL

220
\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc
Page 202 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

47-20-02 (desk mount) and 47-20-03 (wall mount)

185
Front view

224

74
Side view

(70)
Recommended
clearance
Connectors+cables

Rear view

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 203 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

- This page is intentionally left blank -

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 204 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Appendix A – Button cross reference


Application buttons;

Button icon Calibration mode Function


required

no Alternate button function groups.

no Show Lock/Unlock function


buttons dialog.

no Lock function buttons

no Unlock function buttons

no Cancel, close, abort

no Navigate up

no Navigate down

no Exit and save

no Save changes

no Expand current node

no Collapse current node

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 205 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

no/yes Edit selected node or switch to


keypad entry instead of spin entry
input method

no Navigate down

no Reset to original value/s (editor)


Reset calculations (plug-in)

no Add an item to the displayed list

no Remove the selected item from the


displayed list

no Use spin entry (thumbwheel) input


method

Dose, batch or recipe tool buttons;


Button icon Calibration mode Function
required

no Start dosing or batching.

no Stop (abort) dosing or batching.

no Pause dosing.

no Resume dosing (after pause).

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 206 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Function buttons;
Button icon Calibration mode Function
required

no Abort automatic power-on zero and


start weighing

no Set zero if within allowed semi-


automatic zero range

no Toggle tare, activation only allowed


if at positive gross weight value

no Programmable tare, activation only


allowed if at positive gross weight
value

no Show the totalizing printout tool.

no Add current weight to total sum.

no Print total sum then clear sum

no/yes Shown weight with 10x higher


resolution. Only permanently when
calibration mode is active

yes Toggle automatic mode

no Start weight data recorder log

no Stop weight data recorder log

yes Start the graphic analyzer tool

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 207 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

no Show status information

no Search alibi number in alibi storage

no Start display test (approx. 5


seconds)

no Start settings editor

yes Start a full calibration

no Starts the dose and/or batch


interface tools.

no Show the recipe dose tool.

no Starts the quick access setpoint


tool.

no Start the I/O test tool.

no Show the select indicator tool.


Only valid when multiple indicators
are accessible.

no Show the select centre of gravity


tool. Only valid when four
indicators are accessible.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 208 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Appendix B – Flintab standard protocol


A.B.1 Automatic and non-automatic mode weighing
For both non-automatic and automatic mode weighing the weight indicator can
send some informational messages either as a response to a request or
sporadically when an error occurs. The messages that can be sent in both non-
automatic and automatic mode are:
• Do not understand the request (Either an unknown message or incorrect
communication settings.):
Character
1 2 3
Invalid request telegram ‘?’ CR LF

• Error message. See section A.B.4 for possible error codes.


Character
1 2 3 4 5
Error telegram ‘E’  2 digits  CR LF

• Power-on is not finalised (The weight indicator has not finished its start-up
sequence.):
Character
1 2 3
Power-on not finalised ‘!’ CR LF

• Saving weight in alibi memory not possible:


Character
1 2 3
Saving in alibi not possible ‘X’ CR LF

• Warning zero-track/zero-set not performed:


Character
1 2 3
Zero-track, -set not performed ‘W’ CR LF

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 209 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

• Zero-track/zero-set performed:
Character
1 2 3
Zero-track, -set performed ‘Z’ CR LF

A.B.2 Non-automatic weighing


When the indicator is in non-automatic mode the weight indicator can respond
to the following messages.
Note! When in automatic mode it is possible to temporary switch to non-
automatic mode by sending the telegram ‘S’. When in this mode the weight
indicator will respond to the messages according to non-automatic mode. To
return to automatic mode send the message ‘D’. Important – The weight
indicator will always return to automatic mode when the weight on the
scale is below minimum weight ( normally 20 scale divisions ) and
automatic mode has been activated.
When responding to requests, each message from the weight indicator is always
ended with CR, LF.
A.B.2.1 Messages received in non-automatic mode
The requests sent to the weight indicator shall consist of one byte (exception get
alibi weight) with or without terminators such as <CR> or <LF>. The weight
indicator will then respond (if possible) to these requests with a 2-22 byte string,
terminated with <CR><LF> (0x0D, 0x0A).
Requests commanding continuous output of weight data will initiate an
automatic weight data transmission from the weight indicator each 140ms, i.e.
approx. 7 complete transmissions/second.
Normal responses are only generated when weight value is within weighing
range (i.e. display shows weight value). Else an error response is sent instead.
The following requests are available:
ASCII Hex. Request
’1’ 0x31 Respond with displayed weight value if the scale is stable. Gross or
net depending on tare status.
’2’ 0x32 Respond with displayed weight value. Gross or net depending on tare
status.
’3’ 0x33 Respond with gross weight value if the scale is stable.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 210 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

’4’ 0x34 Respond with displayed weight value. Gross or net depending on tare
status. Will start continuous transmissions until a new request is
received.
’5’ 0x35 Respond with displayed weight value and include the stability status
byte. Gross or net depending on tare status.
’6’ 0x36 Respond with displayed weight value and include the stability status
byte. Gross or net depending on tare status. Will start continuous
transmissions until a new request is received.
’7’ 0x37 Respond with gross weight and include the stability status byte..
’8’ 0x38 Respond with gross weight value and include the stability status byte.
Will start continuous transmissions until a new request is received.
’V’ 0x56 Respond with weight indicator type and program version.
’M’ 0x4D Respond with scale max. capacity and one scale interval.
‘S’ 0x53 Responds with ‘S’<cr><lf> as non-automatic mode info.
‘D’ 0x44 Responds with ‘D’<cr><lf> if the indicator can switch back to
automatic mode. If this is not possible (automatic mode not enabled)
the indicator will respond with ‘S’<cr><lf> instead .
‘A’ 0x41 Same as “1” (displayed weight) but if weight indicator is equipped
with alibi memory a seven digit sequence number will be sent
accompanying the weight. I.e. first the sequence number will be sent
and then the weight. The weight is also saved in the alibi memory. See
section 6.1 how to retrieve a stored weight from alibi memory. An
error code can be sent instead if saving is not possible. See section
A.B.4.
‘G’ 0x47 “G” Same as “3” (always gross weight) but if weight indicator is
equipped with alibi memory a seven digit sequence number will be
sent accompanying the weight. See “A” telegram above.
‘Lxxxx - If weight indicator is equipped with alibi memory this telegram
xxx’ request a retrieval of a previously stored weight from the memory.
The seven ‘x’s should be replaced with the seven digit sequence
number of the wanted weight. If the weight is found it will be
displayed on the display during three seconds, if the weight is not
found only a minus sign will be shown instead.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 211 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

A.B.2.2 Messages sent on request in non-automatic mode


The response messages from the weight indicator can have some different
compositions depending on current set-up.
• The inclusion/position of decimal point will follow the display.
• The inclusion of weighing unit will depend on setting.
• If equipped with alibi memory, the weight can be preceded with the seven
digit sequence number. It is also possible to set-up a weight indicator
without alibi memory to send an ‘dummy’ sequence number containing
only 9’s, i.e. ‘9999999’. See section 8.4.1.2.
• A 2-digit ID number can also precede the sequence number. See section
8.4.1.2.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 212 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

If equipped with alibi memory (or ‘dummy’ sequence number is enabled in no-
alibi version), the weight indicator first sends the seven or nine (if ID is
enabled) digit sequence number:
Without ID number Character
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sequence number:  7 digits  Sp

With ID number Character


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Sequence number: 2 digits  7 digits  Sp

After the sequence number the weight indicator will follow with the ‘normal’
weight message according to table below. If the request was “1”,”2”,”3” or “4”
then weight indicator will respond one of these message only ( without
sequence number ):
Numbers slanted ‘1’ with–out Character
sequence number .
Regular is with sequence number 1/9 2/10 3/11 4/12 5/13 6/14 7/15 8/16 9/17
and without ID, increase by two if
ID is included.
Weight value with decimal ‘B’ Sp -/Sp  5 digits + dp 
point:
Weight value without decimal ‘B’ Sp -/Sp  5 digits 
point:
The weight indicator will then end the message with one of the following
terminators:

If without decimal point decrease by Character


one.
If with ID add by two. See above. 10 / 18 11 / 19 12 / 20 13 / 21 14 / 22
Terminator without unit: CR LF
Terminator with unit kilo: Sp ‘k’ ‘g’ CR LF
Terminator with unit ton: Sp ‘t’ CR LF

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 213 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Response to the request “S” or “D” if switching to automatic mode is


impossible:
Character
1 2 3
Non-automatic mode message ‘S’ CR LF

Response to the request “D” if switching to automatic mode was possible:


Character
1 2 3
Automatic mode message ‘D’ CR LF

If the weight is outside weighing range, the overload message is sent instead:
Character
1 2 3 4
Overload message ‘O’ ‘L’ CR LF

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 214 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

A.B.2.3 Examples of non-automatic weighing sequences


First example, the scale is in stable state and inside weighing range. Weight
indicator is set-up to not include unit in the response (example weight 1.50
(kg)).
• The weight indicator receives the message:
Character
1 2 3
Request displayed weight ‘1’

• The weight indicator responds with:


Character
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Gross weight ‘B’ Sp Sp ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘.’ ‘5’ ‘0’ CR LF

Second example weight indicator is equipped with alibi memory; the scale is in
stable state and inside weighing range. Weight indicator is also set-up to include
unit (kilo) in the response (example weight 1.50 kg and sequence number 105).
• The weight indicator receives the message:
Character
1 2 3
Register/request displayed weight: ‘A’

• The weight indicator responds with:


Character
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Weight with sequence number: ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘5’ Sp

Character

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

(continued) ‘B’ Sp Sp ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘.’ ‘5’ ‘0’ Sp ‘k’ ‘g’ CR LF

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 215 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

A.B.3 Automatic mode weighing


When automatic mode is activated the weight indicator will generate a weight
result after a data collection sequence (between start and stop triggers). The
result will be spontaneous sent on the communication port. To disable the
spontaneous sending the telegram ‘hold result in memory “(“’ can be sent to
the weight indicator during a weighing sequence. The weight indicator will then
temporary hold the weighing result in memory. The weight will remain in
memory during three seconds after the finalised weighing sequence, during this
time the weight can be retrieved by sending the telegram ‘get result from
memory “)”’. If the request is sent to late an error code will be transmitted
instead.
If weight indicator is equipped with alibi memory the weight can be preceded
with a seven digit sequence number. The weight is also stored in the alibi
memory (when in automatic mode only for parcels weighed automatically).
When responding to requests, each message from the weight indicator is always
ended with CR, LF.
A.B.3.1 Messages received when data collection is not active
Following messages (ASCII character) can be received in automatic mode when
no data collection sequence is in progress. Telegrams “1” to “8” will generate
“D”, CR, LF as a response if the result from the last weighing sequence is still
on the display (approximately three seconds after ended sequence if weight on
scale is below minimum weight).
ASCII Hex. Request
’1’ 0x31 Respond with displayed weight value if the scale is stable. Gross or
net depending on tare status.
’2’ 0x32 Respond with displayed weight value. Gross or net depending on tare
status.
’3’ 0x33 Respond with gross weight value if the scale is stable.
’4’ 0x34 Respond with displayed weight value. Gross or net depending on tare
status. Will start continuous transmissions until a new request is
received.
’5’ 0x35 Respond with displayed weight value and include the stability status
byte. Gross or net depending on tare status.
’6’ 0x36 Respond with displayed weight value and include the stability status
byte. Gross or net depending on tare status. Will start continuous
transmissions until a new request is received.
’7’ 0x37 Respond with gross weight and include the stability status byte..
’8’ 0x38 Respond with gross weight value and include the stability status byte.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 216 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Will start continuous transmissions until a new request is received.


’V’ 0x56 Respond with weight indicator type and program version.
’M’ 0x4D Respond with scale max. capacity and one scale interval.
‘S’ 0x53 Responds with ”S”, CR, LF and switches momentary switch to non-
automatic mode. The weight indicator will then respond to messages
according to section A.B.2 until scale is unloaded (below minimum
weight) or switched back by command “D”..
‘D’ 0x44 Responds with “D”, CR, LF as automatic mode information

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 217 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

A.B.3.2 Messages sent on request when data collection is not active


If scale has been unloaded after the last weighing sequence and at least three
seconds has passed the following responses are possible. For example of an
automatic weighing sequence see section A.B.3.5.
The response message from the weight indicator can have some different
compositions depending on current set-up.
• The inclusion/position of decimal point will follow the display.
• The inclusion of weighing unit will depend on setting.
Character
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Weight value with decimal ‘B’ ‘D’ -/Sp  5 digits + dp 
point:
Weight value without decimal ‘B’ ‘D’ -/Sp  5 digits 
point:

The weight indicator will then end the message with one of the following
terminators:

If without decimal point decrease by Character


one. See above.
10 11 12 13 14
Terminator without unit: CR LF
Terminator with unit kilo: Sp ‘k’ ‘g’ CR LF
Terminator with unit ton: Sp ‘t’ CR LF

Response to the request “S” :


Character
1 2 3
Non-automatic mode message ‘S’ CR LF

Response to the request “D”. Or if telegrams “1”,”2”,”3” or “4” was received


when the result from the last weighing sequence is still on the display:
Character
1 2 3
Automatic mode message ‘D’ CR LF

A.B.3.3 Message handling while data collection is active


There are two separate cases when the weight indicator operates in so called
automatic mode.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 218 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

• The result of weighing is sent automatically as soon as the parcel leaves the
scale. The synchronisation with the parcel and communication is controlled
by the photocell interface (or an equivalent external signal).
• The weight indicator receives the message “(“‘hold weight in memory’
during, or just before a data collection sequence. The weight indicator will
then hold the transmission until the message “)” ‘retrieve weight from
memory’ is received or until three seconds has passed since last weighing
sequence. The message “)” must be received during the three seconds after
an ended weighting sequence else an error code will be transmitted instead.
The synchronisation with the parcel is still accomplished by the photocell
interface but the host controls when the result is sent.
Following messages (ASCII character) can be received:
• ”D” Sends ”D”, CR, LF as in motion info ( also telegrams “1” to “8” ).
• ”(” Disable spontaneous sending of weighing result ‘hold result in memory’.
I.e. if this message is received just before or during a data collection
sequence the weight indicator will not spontaneously send the result when
sequence is finished. The weight indicator will instead temporary store the
result in memory during three seconds after ended sequence. To retrieve the
weighing result during these three seconds send the “)” message.

• “)” Re-enable spontaneous sending of weighing result ‘get result from


memory’. If possible the weight indicator will respond with result of the last
weighing sequence (must be within three seconds after ended weighing
sequence). If this message is received to late or during a weighing sequence
an error code is transmitted instead. See section A.B.4 for possible error
codes.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 219 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

A.B.3.4 Messages sent in automatic mode after data collection has ended
In automatic mode, when data collection stops, the weight indicator either
automatically sends the result or sends the result when the command “)” is
received.
The weight message from the weight indicator can have some different
compositions depending on current set-up.
• The inclusion/position of decimal point will follow the display.
• The inclusion of weighing unit will depend on setting.
• If equipped with alibi memory, the weight can be preceded with the seven
digit sequence number. It is also possible to set-up an weight indicator
without alibi memory to send an ‘dummy’ sequence number containing
only 9’s, i.e. ‘9999999’. See section 8.4.1.2.
• A 2-digit ID number can also precede the sequence number. See section
8.4.1.2.
If equipped with alibi memory (or ‘dummy’ sequence number is enabled in no-
alibi version), the weight indicator first sends the seven or nine (if ID is
enabled) digit sequence number:
Without ID number Character
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Sequence number:  7 digits  Sp

With ID number Character


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Sequence number: 2 digits  7 digits  Sp

After the sequence number the weight indicator will follow with the ‘normal’
weight message according to table below. If the weight indicator is not equipped
with alibi memory the message will start with this table.
Numbers slanted ‘1’ with–out Character
sequence number.
Regular is with sequence number 1/9 2/10 3/11 4/12 5/13 6/14 7/15
and without ID, increase by two if
ID is included.
Weight value with decimal Sp  5 digits + dp 
point:
Weight value without decimal Sp  5 digits 
point:
Continued on next page

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 220 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

From previous page


The weight indicator will then end the message with one of the following
terminators:

If without decimal point decrease by Character


one. See above.
If with ID add by two. See above. 8/16 9/17 10/18 11/19 12/20
Terminator without unit: CR LF
Terminator with unit kilo: Sp ‘k’ ‘g’ CR LF
Terminator with unit ton: Sp ‘t’ CR LF

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 221 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

A.B.3.5 Example of automatic weighing sequences


First example: The weight indicator has no alibi memory, is set-up to not
include unit in the weight telegram and the host does not send the “(“ and “)
telegrams to synchronise the communication. Example weight ‘1.50’ ( kg ).
• The parcel is inducted on the scale belt, as soon as the back end is on the
belt photocell input triggers start data collection sequence. The weight
indicator will show the letter‘d’ on the display.

Parcel flow

Photocell,between
infeed and scale belt.

Parcel

Induction belt Scale belt Outfeed belt


d

• Parcel front-end is just leaving the scale belt. The weight indicator will
update the display with parcel weight. The weight will also be sent on the
communication port according to table below:

Parcel flow

Photocell,between
infeed and scale belt.

Parcel

Induction belt Scale belt Outfeed belt


1.50

Character
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
‘In-motion’ weight Sp ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘.’ ‘5’ ‘0’ CR LF

Note! If a new parcel is introduced on the scale belt before the previous has
started to leave. The weight indicator will end the current weighing sequence
and send the result immediately. In this case the weighing time can be to short
and an error code will be transmitted instead. Therefore care should be taken

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 222 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

that parcels are separated/spaced with front-end to front-end the same distance
as the scale length. Contact Flintab if smaller spacing is wanted.
Second example: The weight indicator includes alibi memory, is set-up to
include unit ‘kg’ in the weight message and the host sends messages “(“and “)”
to synchronise the communication, further; the weight indicator does not send
an ID number preceding the sequence number. Example weight ‘1.50’ kg and
sequence number ‘105’.
• The parcel is introduced on the scale belt, as soon as the back end is on the
belt; the photocell input triggers start data collection sequence. The weight
indicator will show the letter ‘d’ on the display.

Parcel flow

Photocell,between
infeed and scale belt.

Parcel

Induction belt Scale belt Outfeed belt


d

• The weight indicator receives the message “(“ ‘hold result in memory’
during the weighing sequence.
Character
1 2 3
Hold weighing result in memory ‘(’

• Parcel front-end is just leaving the scale belt. The weight indicator will
update the display with parcel weight. The weight will not be sent on the
communication port.

Parcel flow

Photocell,between
infeed and scale belt.

Parcel

Induction belt Scale belt Outfeed belt


1.50

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 223 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

• The weight indicator receives the message “)” ‘get result from memory’ and
transmits the weighing result on the communication line
Character
1 2 3
Get result from memory ‘)’

The weight indicator responds with:


Character
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Weight with sequence number: ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘5’ Sp

Character

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

( continued ) Sp ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘.’ ‘5’ ‘0’ Sp ‘k’ ‘g’ CR LF

If the message “)” ‘get result from memory is received during the data
collection sequence or after the three second time-out period an error code will
be transmitted instead.

A.B.4 Error codes


Code Description Possible cause

E04 Mode switching to non-automatic while data Operator switched off automatic mode during a weighing
collection was active. sequence.

E05 To few weight values accumulated during data The time between start and stop triggers was below
collection. minimum time.

E06 Zero has not been set. Scale was not zero when Scale must be unloaded at power-on and periodically
switching to automatic mode or the zero- during weighing when switching to automatic mode. See
tracking has not been active for a while. also section 8.2.7.

E07 Weight below minimum weight in automatic Weight to low.


mode.

E09 Weight peak-to-peak amplitude to high during Disturbance or bad mounting.


data collection.

E13 Negative weight in automatic mode. Possible incorrect zero or weight to low.

E23 Overload on scale in automatic mode. Weight to heavy.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 224 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

E40 Weighing time to short. The time between start and stop triggers was below
minimum time.

E47 Incomplete weighing sequence Telegram “(“- hold weight in memory received but the
previous weight has not been requested by telegram “)”-
get weight from memory.

E48 Request “)”- get weight from memory received Telegram “)”-get weight from memory is received too
before weighing sequence was finished. early, before the current weighing sequence is finished.

E49 Request “)” – get weight from memory received Telegram “)”-get weight from memory is received too late,
when no weight is present in memory. after the result from the last weighing sequence is
discarded ( normally three seconds ).

The indicator remains in error mode for approximately 3 seconds in non-


automatic mode and returns (to weighing mode) directly if in automatic mode.
The error code is displayed three seconds if weight on scale is below minimum
weight or a new weighing result is displayed

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 225 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

- This page is intentionally left blank -

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 226 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Appendix C – Printout examples

Totalizing printouts:

======== FLINTAB =========


Header
01 0000011 N 7.00 t
T 28.01 t
02 0000013 N 17.00 t Part weights, tares, alibi and sum
PT 18.01 t
03 0000015 35.01 t

SUM: 59.01 t

== VÅGAR SYSTEM SERVICE == Footer

======== FLINTAB =========


Header
01 1006 kg
02 1006 kg
03 1006 kg Part weights and sum (no alibi, one Net weight)
04 N - 1008 kg
T 1500 kg

SUM: 4026 kg

== VÅGAR SYSTEM SERVICE == Footer

======== FLINTAB ========= Header

Totalizing 2 items. (0000148-0000149)


Number of weights, alibi included and sum
SUM: 4028 kg
Footer
== VÅGAR SYSTEM SERVICE ==

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 227 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

PrintLog printouts (batch):

======== Flintab AB Jönköping =========


Header (start)
Date/Time BatchWeight DoseWeight Seq.no BatchID
2012-02-28 13:07:41 0kg 0kg 1517
2012-02-28 13:08:41 700kg 700kg 1518
2012-02-28 13:09:41 1400kg 700kg 1519 Dose weights
2012-02-28 13:10:41 2000kg 600kg 1520
2012-02-28 13:10:41 2000kg *End batch 18 Footer (end)

PrintLog printouts (IdPrompt example, no header/footer):

LOCATION 123;ABC12345AB;1000kg

Weight

Operator input (ID)

Fixed text

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 228 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

Appendix D – Installation checklist, Dosing


As the dose module is highly versatile it is also contains a vast amount of
parameters to cater for a broad spectrum of installations. This guide aims to
pinpoint most of the important steps that needs to be considered during
commissioning of the indicator in a dosing application. However, it is not a
complete list of all of the possibilities the module provides, it is still essential
that installation personnel carefully understands all of the steps in the dosing
cycle and corresponding parameters by reading section 8.10.

A.D.1 Define and configure I/O


The first step during commissioning is to define required I/O’s between the
indicator and external systems. At bare minimum a stop dosing input (for
safety concerns) and fine dosing output is suggested, others are optional
depending on application requirements. Further, a single input signal can be
shared by one or several internal states, allowing efficient and simplified
exchange between the indicator and external systems.

Fill in relevant data


Function Section Direction I/O or Comment Checked
IN OUT Not used
Start dosing 8.10.2.1  
Stop dosing (abort) 8.10.2.4  
Pause dosing 8.10.2.5  
Zero check Enable 8.10.2.6  
Tare Enable 8.10.2.7  
Pre dose Enable 8.10.2.8  
Course Dose Enable 8.10.2.9  
(conditions0_3)
Fine Dose Enable 8.10.2.10  
(conditions0_3)
Empty Enable 8.10.2.15  
(conditions0_3)
Course Dose 8.10.2.9  
Fine Dose 8.10.2.10  
Ready 8.10.2.13  
Error Output 8.10.2.16  
Alarm Output 8.10.2.17  
Empty Output 8.10.2.15  

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 229 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

A.D.2 Configure dosing stages


After I/O’s of the dosing application have been defined, the general behaviour
of the dosing module must be setup.
 First the parameter Dose1->DoseIn must be set correctly, see section
8.10.1; DoseIn=DoseIn means that the module is used to dose product
into the container on the scale i.e. weight increases when dosing.
DoseIn=DoseOut means that the module is used to dose product out
from the container on the scale i.e. weight decreases when dosing.
Then the dosing stages need to be enabled where applicable, note some stages
are not relevant depending on if the module is used for DoseIn or DoseOut.
Also, some stages require setup of stability criteria. See table below:

Stage Section DoseIn DoseOut Comment Checked


Zero 8.10.2.6 n/a If required to verify that the weight is
 zero or within specified range when

starting dosing. If this stage is used,
then the Tare stage is not applicable
Tare 8.10.2.7
()  If required to tare the weight in the
container before start of dosing. In

principle mandatory for DoseOut
applications. If this stage is used
then Zero stage is not applicable.
PreDose 8.10.2.8
 () If a small amount of product should
be dosed before normal dosing.

Post Fel! Hittar If a small amount of product should
inte
  be dosed after FineDose if the

referenskälla. weight is still below target.
Ready 8.10.2.13 How long the dosing module will be
  in Ready state after weight result

has been calculated
Empty 8.10.2.15 n/a If the container should be emptied
 after dosing.

NoFlow 8.10.2.18 If the NoFlow alarm should be active
  and check product flow during

course-and fine-dose stages.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 230 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

A.D.3 Setup initial dosing parameters


When I/O’s and dosing stages have been properly setup, the next step is to
enter the initial values for dosing parameters. Note: DoseValue is normally
set outside the settings editor while in operation, however it’s advisable that
initially all values are set through the settings editor before bringing the
system into operation.

Parameter Section Value Comment Checked


Dose1->Enabled 8.10.1 True Enable the dose module

Dose1->DoseValue 8.10.1 <user> Initial target for the dosing module

Dose1->FineDose->Value 8.10.2.10 <user> The trip point below target where only
FineDose will continue i.e. CourseDose

= DoseValue - FineDose.
Dose1->FineDose->OverswingTime 8.10.2.10 <user> Time after CourseDose where the dosing
module runs ‘blind’.

Dose1->Target->InflightTime 8.10.2.12 <user> Delay after FineDose has finished until
weight result is calculated.

Dose1->Target->InflightPercent 8.10.2.12 0% If automatic inflight calculation and
correction should be done by the dosing

module and how much of the error is
allowed to be corrected between dosing
cycles (InflightValue). Should initially be
set to zero.
Dose1->Target->InflightValue 8.10.2.12 0 kg The trip point below target where
FineDose is stopped. Can be

automatically re-calculated after each
dosing cycle when InflightPercent is
nonzero. Should initially be set to zero.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 231 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6
INSTRUCTION 4-54935
2012-06-28 / Tony Kübek Edition 1.7

A.D.4 Fine tuning of dosing parameters


To ensure the most accurate dosing results, the sequential list below can be
used as a guide. Between each step one or several dosing cycles needs to be
executed so that the effect of an eventual change in parameter value can fully
be realised.

Step Stage Section Comment Checked


1 Target 8.10.2.12 Prerequisite: Dose1->Target_>InflightValue = 0

Make sure that Dose1->Target->InflightTime correctly allows
the dosed product to fully enter the container before the weight
calculation is done. To short time will make the dosing module
prematurely acquire the weight before the product has entered
the container i.e. measured weight is lower than real value. The
value needs to reflect the length of piping and viscosity of the
product. When correctly setup the dosed weight is normally
higher than requested due to the InflightValue being zero at this
point.
2 Target 8.10.2.12 Prerequisite: Dose1->Target->InflightTime; allows for all dosed
product to fully enter the container before the module calculates

the weight result.
By running several dosing cycles, the weight result should be
slightly higher than desired DoseValue. In this case the Dose1-
>Target->InflightValue can be set to the difference between
DoseValue and weight result. When correctly setup the
InflightValue should compensate for the deviation and make the
weight result equal to DoseValue. Optionally the automatic
inflight re-calculation can now be activated by setting the Dose1-
>Target->InflightPercent to a value other than 0%.

\\F1\Avd\85\Produkter\VIKTINDIKATOR\Handhavande\47-20\4-54935 rev 1-7 Instruction 47-20 basic 120628.doc


Page 232 (232)
Flintab AB Tel 036-314 200 Fax 036-18 50 79 Vat No (Org.nr) SE556208398901
Kabelvägen 4 mail@flintab.se www.flintab.se Bankgiro 349-2170
553 02 JÖNKÖPING Postgiro 85 73 20-6

You might also like